diff options
author | Artem Bityutskiy <Artem.Bityutskiy@nokia.com> | 2009-09-21 12:09:22 +0300 |
---|---|---|
committer | Artem Bityutskiy <Artem.Bityutskiy@nokia.com> | 2009-09-21 12:09:22 +0300 |
commit | 7cce2f4cb7f5f641f78c8e3eea4e7b1b96cb71c0 (patch) | |
tree | b064d077928cf224660ab1e1841cdab2c9fd8b08 /Documentation | |
parent | e055f7e873d900925c222cf2d1ec955af4a9ca90 (diff) | |
parent | ebc79c4f8da0f92efa968e0328f32334a2ce80cf (diff) |
Merge branch 'master' of git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux-2.6 into linux-next
Conflicts:
fs/ubifs/super.c
Merge the upstream tree in order to resolve a conflict with the
per-bdi writeback changes from the linux-2.6-block tree.
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
85 files changed, 6011 insertions, 774 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index d05737aaa84..06b982affe7 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -82,6 +82,8 @@ block/ - info on the Block I/O (BIO) layer. blockdev/ - info on block devices & drivers +btmrvl.txt + - info on Marvell Bluetooth driver usage. cachetlb.txt - describes the cache/TLB flushing interfaces Linux uses. cdrom/ diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block index cbbd3e06994..5f3bedaf8e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block @@ -94,28 +94,37 @@ What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/physical_block_size Date: May 2009 Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> Description: - This is the smallest unit the storage device can write - without resorting to read-modify-write operation. It is - usually the same as the logical block size but may be - bigger. One example is SATA drives with 4KB sectors - that expose a 512-byte logical block size to the - operating system. + This is the smallest unit a physical storage device can + write atomically. It is usually the same as the logical + block size but may be bigger. One example is SATA + drives with 4KB sectors that expose a 512-byte logical + block size to the operating system. For stacked block + devices the physical_block_size variable contains the + maximum physical_block_size of the component devices. What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/minimum_io_size Date: April 2009 Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> Description: - Storage devices may report a preferred minimum I/O size, - which is the smallest request the device can perform - without incurring a read-modify-write penalty. For disk - drives this is often the physical block size. For RAID - arrays it is often the stripe chunk size. + Storage devices may report a granularity or preferred + minimum I/O size which is the smallest request the + device can perform without incurring a performance + penalty. For disk drives this is often the physical + block size. For RAID arrays it is often the stripe + chunk size. A properly aligned multiple of + minimum_io_size is the preferred request size for + workloads where a high number of I/O operations is + desired. What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/optimal_io_size Date: April 2009 Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> Description: Storage devices may report an optimal I/O size, which is - the device's preferred unit of receiving I/O. This is - rarely reported for disk drives. For RAID devices it is - usually the stripe width or the internal block size. + the device's preferred unit for sustained I/O. This is + rarely reported for disk drives. For RAID arrays it is + usually the stripe width or the internal track size. A + properly aligned multiple of optimal_io_size is the + preferred request size for workloads where sustained + throughput is desired. If no optimal I/O size is + reported this file contains 0. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci index 6bf68053e4b..25be3250f7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci @@ -84,6 +84,16 @@ Description: from this part of the device tree. Depends on CONFIG_HOTPLUG. +What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../reset +Date: July 2009 +Contact: Michael S. Tsirkin <mst@redhat.com> +Description: + Some devices allow an individual function to be reset + without affecting other functions in the same device. + For devices that have this support, a file named reset + will be present in sysfs. Writing 1 to this file + will perform reset. + What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../vpd Date: February 2008 Contact: Ben Hutchings <bhutchings@solarflare.com> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl index a50d6cd5857..992e67e6be7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl @@ -449,8 +449,8 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "i = %u\n", i); </para> <programlisting> -__u32 ipaddress; -printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %d.%d.%d.%d\n", NIPQUAD(ipaddress)); +__be32 ipaddress; +printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %pI4\n", &ipaddress); </programlisting> <para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index 8f6e3b2403c..4d4ce0e61e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -25,6 +25,10 @@ <year>2006-2008</year> <holder>Hans-JĆ¼rgen Koch.</holder> </copyright> +<copyright> + <year>2009</year> + <holder>Red Hat Inc, Michael S. Tsirkin (mst@redhat.com)</holder> +</copyright> <legalnotice> <para> @@ -42,6 +46,13 @@ GPL version 2. <revhistory> <revision> + <revnumber>0.9</revnumber> + <date>2009-07-16</date> + <authorinitials>mst</authorinitials> + <revremark>Added generic pci driver + </revremark> + </revision> + <revision> <revnumber>0.8</revnumber> <date>2008-12-24</date> <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials> @@ -809,6 +820,158 @@ framework to set up sysfs files for this region. Simply leave it alone. </chapter> +<chapter id="uio_pci_generic" xreflabel="Using Generic driver for PCI cards"> +<?dbhtml filename="uio_pci_generic.html"?> +<title>Generic PCI UIO driver</title> + <para> + The generic driver is a kernel module named uio_pci_generic. + It can work with any device compliant to PCI 2.3 (circa 2002) and + any compliant PCI Express device. Using this, you only need to + write the userspace driver, removing the need to write + a hardware-specific kernel module. + </para> + +<sect1 id="uio_pci_generic_binding"> +<title>Making the driver recognize the device</title> + <para> +Since the driver does not declare any device ids, it will not get loaded +automatically and will not automatically bind to any devices, you must load it +and allocate id to the driver yourself. For example: + <programlisting> + modprobe uio_pci_generic + echo "8086 10f5" > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/uio_pci_generic/new_id + </programlisting> + </para> + <para> +If there already is a hardware specific kernel driver for your device, the +generic driver still won't bind to it, in this case if you want to use the +generic driver (why would you?) you'll have to manually unbind the hardware +specific driver and bind the generic driver, like this: + <programlisting> + echo -n 0000:00:19.0 > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/e1000e/unbind + echo -n 0000:00:19.0 > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/uio_pci_generic/bind + </programlisting> + </para> + <para> +You can verify that the device has been bound to the driver +by looking for it in sysfs, for example like the following: + <programlisting> + ls -l /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:00:19.0/driver + </programlisting> +Which if successful should print + <programlisting> + .../0000:00:19.0/driver -> ../../../bus/pci/drivers/uio_pci_generic + </programlisting> +Note that the generic driver will not bind to old PCI 2.2 devices. +If binding the device failed, run the following command: + <programlisting> + dmesg + </programlisting> +and look in the output for failure reasons + </para> +</sect1> + +<sect1 id="uio_pci_generic_internals"> +<title>Things to know about uio_pci_generic</title> + <para> +Interrupts are handled using the Interrupt Disable bit in the PCI command +register and Interrupt Status bit in the PCI status register. All devices +compliant to PCI 2.3 (circa 2002) and all compliant PCI Express devices should +support these bits. uio_pci_generic detects this support, and won't bind to +devices which do not support the Interrupt Disable Bit in the command register. + </para> + <para> +On each interrupt, uio_pci_generic sets the Interrupt Disable bit. +This prevents the device from generating further interrupts +until the bit is cleared. The userspace driver should clear this +bit before blocking and waiting for more interrupts. + </para> +</sect1> +<sect1 id="uio_pci_generic_userspace"> +<title>Writing userspace driver using uio_pci_generic</title> + <para> +Userspace driver can use pci sysfs interface, or the +libpci libray that wraps it, to talk to the device and to +re-enable interrupts by writing to the command register. + </para> +</sect1> +<sect1 id="uio_pci_generic_example"> +<title>Example code using uio_pci_generic</title> + <para> +Here is some sample userspace driver code using uio_pci_generic: +<programlisting> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <stdio.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <sys/stat.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <errno.h> + +int main() +{ + int uiofd; + int configfd; + int err; + int i; + unsigned icount; + unsigned char command_high; + + uiofd = open("/dev/uio0", O_RDONLY); + if (uiofd < 0) { + perror("uio open:"); + return errno; + } + configfd = open("/sys/class/uio/uio0/device/config", O_RDWR); + if (uiofd < 0) { + perror("config open:"); + return errno; + } + + /* Read and cache command value */ + err = pread(configfd, &command_high, 1, 5); + if (err != 1) { + perror("command config read:"); + return errno; + } + command_high &= ~0x4; + + for(i = 0;; ++i) { + /* Print out a message, for debugging. */ + if (i == 0) + fprintf(stderr, "Started uio test driver.\n"); + else + fprintf(stderr, "Interrupts: %d\n", icount); + + /****************************************/ + /* Here we got an interrupt from the + device. Do something to it. */ + /****************************************/ + + /* Re-enable interrupts. */ + err = pwrite(configfd, &command_high, 1, 5); + if (err != 1) { + perror("config write:"); + break; + } + + /* Wait for next interrupt. */ + err = read(uiofd, &icount, 4); + if (err != 4) { + perror("uio read:"); + break; + } + + } + return errno; +} + +</programlisting> + </para> +</sect1> + +</chapter> + <appendix id="app1"> <title>Further information</title> <itemizedlist> diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt index 6650af43252..e83f2ea7641 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt @@ -4,15 +4,17 @@ February 2, 2006 Current document maintainer: - Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com> + Linas Vepstas <linasvepstas@gmail.com> + updated by Richard Lary <rlary@us.ibm.com> + and Mike Mason <mmlnx@us.ibm.com> on 27-Jul-2009 Many PCI bus controllers are able to detect a variety of hardware PCI errors on the bus, such as parity errors on the data and address busses, as well as SERR and PERR errors. Some of the more advanced chipsets are able to deal with these errors; these include PCI-E chipsets, -and the PCI-host bridges found on IBM Power4 and Power5-based pSeries -boxes. A typical action taken is to disconnect the affected device, +and the PCI-host bridges found on IBM Power4, Power5 and Power6-based +pSeries boxes. A typical action taken is to disconnect the affected device, halting all I/O to it. The goal of a disconnection is to avoid system corruption; for example, to halt system memory corruption due to DMA's to "wild" addresses. Typically, a reconnection mechanism is also @@ -37,10 +39,11 @@ is forced by the need to handle multi-function devices, that is, devices that have multiple device drivers associated with them. In the first stage, each driver is allowed to indicate what type of reset it desires, the choices being a simple re-enabling of I/O -or requesting a hard reset (a full electrical #RST of the PCI card). -If any driver requests a full reset, that is what will be done. +or requesting a slot reset. -After a full reset and/or a re-enabling of I/O, all drivers are +If any driver requests a slot reset, that is what will be done. + +After a reset and/or a re-enabling of I/O, all drivers are again notified, so that they may then perform any device setup/config that may be required. After these have all completed, a final "resume normal operations" event is sent out. @@ -101,7 +104,7 @@ if it implements any, it must implement error_detected(). If a callback is not implemented, the corresponding feature is considered unsupported. For example, if mmio_enabled() and resume() aren't there, then it is assumed that the driver is not doing any direct recovery and requires -a reset. If link_reset() is not implemented, the card is assumed as +a slot reset. If link_reset() is not implemented, the card is assumed to not care about link resets. Typically a driver will want to know about a slot_reset(). @@ -111,7 +114,7 @@ sequence described below. STEP 0: Error Event ------------------- -PCI bus error is detect by the PCI hardware. On powerpc, the slot +A PCI bus error is detected by the PCI hardware. On powerpc, the slot is isolated, in that all I/O is blocked: all reads return 0xffffffff, all writes are ignored. @@ -139,7 +142,7 @@ The driver must return one of the following result codes: a chance to extract some diagnostic information (see mmio_enable, below). - PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET: - Driver returns this if it can't recover without a hard + Driver returns this if it can't recover without a slot reset. - PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT: Driver returns this if it doesn't want to recover at all. @@ -169,11 +172,11 @@ is STEP 6 (Permanent Failure). >>> The current powerpc implementation doesn't much care if the device >>> attempts I/O at this point, or not. I/O's will fail, returning ->>> a value of 0xff on read, and writes will be dropped. If the device ->>> driver attempts more than 10K I/O's to a frozen adapter, it will ->>> assume that the device driver has gone into an infinite loop, and ->>> it will panic the kernel. There doesn't seem to be any other ->>> way of stopping a device driver that insists on spinning on I/O. +>>> a value of 0xff on read, and writes will be dropped. If more than +>>> EEH_MAX_FAILS I/O's are attempted to a frozen adapter, EEH +>>> assumes that the device driver has gone into an infinite loop +>>> and prints an error to syslog. A reboot is then required to +>>> get the device working again. STEP 2: MMIO Enabled ------------------- @@ -182,15 +185,14 @@ DMA), and then calls the mmio_enabled() callback on all affected device drivers. This is the "early recovery" call. IOs are allowed again, but DMA is -not (hrm... to be discussed, I prefer not), with some restrictions. This -is NOT a callback for the driver to start operations again, only to -peek/poke at the device, extract diagnostic information, if any, and -eventually do things like trigger a device local reset or some such, -but not restart operations. This is callback is made if all drivers on -a segment agree that they can try to recover and if no automatic link reset -was performed by the HW. If the platform can't just re-enable IOs without -a slot reset or a link reset, it wont call this callback, and instead -will have gone directly to STEP 3 (Link Reset) or STEP 4 (Slot Reset) +not, with some restrictions. This is NOT a callback for the driver to +start operations again, only to peek/poke at the device, extract diagnostic +information, if any, and eventually do things like trigger a device local +reset or some such, but not restart operations. This callback is made if +all drivers on a segment agree that they can try to recover and if no automatic +link reset was performed by the HW. If the platform can't just re-enable IOs +without a slot reset or a link reset, it will not call this callback, and +instead will have gone directly to STEP 3 (Link Reset) or STEP 4 (Slot Reset) >>> The following is proposed; no platform implements this yet: >>> Proposal: All I/O's should be done _synchronously_ from within @@ -228,9 +230,6 @@ proceeds to either STEP3 (Link Reset) or to STEP 5 (Resume Operations). If any driver returned PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET, then the platform proceeds to STEP 4 (Slot Reset) ->>> The current powerpc implementation does not implement this callback. - - STEP 3: Link Reset ------------------ The platform resets the link, and then calls the link_reset() callback @@ -253,16 +252,33 @@ The platform then proceeds to either STEP 4 (Slot Reset) or STEP 5 >>> The current powerpc implementation does not implement this callback. - STEP 4: Slot Reset ------------------ -The platform performs a soft or hard reset of the device, and then -calls the slot_reset() callback. -A soft reset consists of asserting the adapter #RST line and then +In response to a return value of PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET, the +the platform will peform a slot reset on the requesting PCI device(s). +The actual steps taken by a platform to perform a slot reset +will be platform-dependent. Upon completion of slot reset, the +platform will call the device slot_reset() callback. + +Powerpc platforms implement two levels of slot reset: +soft reset(default) and fundamental(optional) reset. + +Powerpc soft reset consists of asserting the adapter #RST line and then restoring the PCI BAR's and PCI configuration header to a state that is equivalent to what it would be after a fresh system power-on followed by power-on BIOS/system firmware initialization. +Soft reset is also known as hot-reset. + +Powerpc fundamental reset is supported by PCI Express cards only +and results in device's state machines, hardware logic, port states and +configuration registers to initialize to their default conditions. + +For most PCI devices, a soft reset will be sufficient for recovery. +Optional fundamental reset is provided to support a limited number +of PCI Express PCI devices for which a soft reset is not sufficient +for recovery. + If the platform supports PCI hotplug, then the reset might be performed by toggling the slot electrical power off/on. @@ -274,10 +290,12 @@ may result in hung devices, kernel panics, or silent data corruption. This call gives drivers the chance to re-initialize the hardware (re-download firmware, etc.). At this point, the driver may assume -that he card is in a fresh state and is fully functional. In -particular, interrupt generation should work normally. +that the card is in a fresh state and is fully functional. The slot +is unfrozen and the driver has full access to PCI config space, +memory mapped I/O space and DMA. Interrupts (Legacy, MSI, or MSI-X) +will also be available. -Drivers should not yet restart normal I/O processing operations +Drivers should not restart normal I/O processing operations at this point. If all device drivers report success on this callback, the platform will call resume() to complete the sequence, and let the driver restart normal I/O processing. @@ -302,11 +320,21 @@ driver performs device init only from PCI function 0: - PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT Same as above. +Drivers for PCI Express cards that require a fundamental reset must +set the needs_freset bit in the pci_dev structure in their probe function. +For example, the QLogic qla2xxx driver sets the needs_freset bit for certain +PCI card types: + ++ /* Set EEH reset type to fundamental if required by hba */ ++ if (IS_QLA24XX(ha) || IS_QLA25XX(ha) || IS_QLA81XX(ha)) ++ pdev->needs_freset = 1; ++ + Platform proceeds either to STEP 5 (Resume Operations) or STEP 6 (Permanent Failure). ->>> The current powerpc implementation does not currently try a ->>> power-cycle reset if the driver returned PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT. +>>> The current powerpc implementation does not try a power-cycle +>>> reset if the driver returned PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT. >>> However, it probably should. @@ -348,7 +376,7 @@ software errors. Conclusion; General Remarks --------------------------- -The way those callbacks are called is platform policy. A platform with +The way the callbacks are called is platform policy. A platform with no slot reset capability may want to just "ignore" drivers that can't recover (disconnect them) and try to let other cards on the same segment recover. Keep in mind that in most real life cases, though, there will @@ -361,8 +389,8 @@ That is, the recovery API only requires that: - There is no guarantee that interrupt delivery can proceed from any device on the segment starting from the error detection and until the -resume callback is sent, at which point interrupts are expected to be -fully operational. +slot_reset callback is called, at which point interrupts are expected +to be fully operational. - There is no guarantee that interrupt delivery is stopped, that is, a driver that gets an interrupt after detecting an error, or that detects @@ -381,16 +409,23 @@ anyway :) >>> Implementation details for the powerpc platform are discussed in >>> the file Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt ->>> As of this writing, there are six device drivers with patches ->>> implementing error recovery. Not all of these patches are in +>>> As of this writing, there is a growing list of device drivers with +>>> patches implementing error recovery. Not all of these patches are in >>> mainline yet. These may be used as "examples": >>> ->>> drivers/scsi/ipr.c ->>> drivers/scsi/sym53cxx_2 +>>> drivers/scsi/ipr +>>> drivers/scsi/sym53c8xx_2 +>>> drivers/scsi/qla2xxx +>>> drivers/scsi/lpfc +>>> drivers/next/bnx2.c >>> drivers/next/e100.c >>> drivers/net/e1000 +>>> drivers/net/e1000e >>> drivers/net/ixgb +>>> drivers/net/ixgbe +>>> drivers/net/cxgb3 >>> drivers/net/s2io.c +>>> drivers/net/qlge The End ------- diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt b/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt index 9f711d2df91..d2b85237c76 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/RTFP.txt @@ -743,3 +743,80 @@ Revised: RCU, realtime RCU, sleepable RCU, performance. " } + +@article{PaulEMcKenney2008RCUOSR +,author="Paul E. McKenney and Jonathan Walpole" +,title="Introducing technology into the {Linux} kernel: a case study" +,Year="2008" +,journal="SIGOPS Oper. Syst. Rev." +,volume="42" +,number="5" +,pages="4--17" +,issn="0163-5980" +,doi={http://doi.acm.org/10.1145/1400097.1400099} +,publisher="ACM" +,address="New York, NY, USA" +,annotation={ + Linux changed RCU to a far greater degree than RCU has changed Linux. +} +} + +@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2008HierarchicalRCU +,Author="Paul E. McKenney" +,Title="Hierarchical {RCU}" +,month="November" +,day="3" +,year="2008" +,note="Available: +\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/305782/} +[Viewed November 6, 2008]" +,annotation=" + RCU with combining-tree-based grace-period detection, + permitting it to handle thousands of CPUs. +" +} + +@conference{PaulEMcKenney2009MaliciousURCU +,Author="Paul E. McKenney" +,Title="Using a Malicious User-Level {RCU} to Torture {RCU}-Based Algorithms" +,Booktitle="linux.conf.au 2009" +,month="January" +,year="2009" +,address="Hobart, Australia" +,note="Available: +\url{http://www.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/RCU/urcutorture.2009.01.22a.pdf} +[Viewed February 2, 2009]" +,annotation=" + Realtime RCU and torture-testing RCU uses. +" +} + +@unpublished{MathieuDesnoyers2009URCU +,Author="Mathieu Desnoyers" +,Title="[{RFC} git tree] Userspace {RCU} (urcu) for {Linux}" +,month="February" +,day="5" +,year="2009" +,note="Available: +\url{http://lkml.org/lkml/2009/2/5/572} +\url{git://lttng.org/userspace-rcu.git} +[Viewed February 20, 2009]" +,annotation=" + Mathieu Desnoyers's user-space RCU implementation. + git://lttng.org/userspace-rcu.git +" +} + +@unpublished{PaulEMcKenney2009BloatWatchRCU +,Author="Paul E. McKenney" +,Title="{RCU}: The {Bloatwatch} Edition" +,month="March" +,day="17" +,year="2009" +,note="Available: +\url{http://lwn.net/Articles/323929/} +[Viewed March 20, 2009]" +,annotation=" + Uniprocessor assumptions allow simplified RCU implementation. +" +} diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt b/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt index aab4a9ec393..90ec5341ee9 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/UP.txt @@ -2,14 +2,13 @@ RCU on Uniprocessor Systems A common misconception is that, on UP systems, the call_rcu() primitive -may immediately invoke its function, and that the synchronize_rcu() -primitive may return immediately. The basis of this misconception +may immediately invoke its function. The basis of this misconception is that since there is only one CPU, it should not be necessary to wait for anything else to get done, since there are no other CPUs for anything else to be happening on. Although this approach will -sort- -of- work a surprising amount of the time, it is a very bad idea in general. -This document presents three examples that demonstrate exactly how bad an -idea this is. +This document presents three examples that demonstrate exactly how bad +an idea this is. Example 1: softirq Suicide @@ -82,11 +81,18 @@ Quick Quiz #2: What locking restriction must RCU callbacks respect? Summary -Permitting call_rcu() to immediately invoke its arguments or permitting -synchronize_rcu() to immediately return breaks RCU, even on a UP system. -So do not do it! Even on a UP system, the RCU infrastructure -must- -respect grace periods, and -must- invoke callbacks from a known environment -in which no locks are held. +Permitting call_rcu() to immediately invoke its arguments breaks RCU, +even on a UP system. So do not do it! Even on a UP system, the RCU +infrastructure -must- respect grace periods, and -must- invoke callbacks +from a known environment in which no locks are held. + +It -is- safe for synchronize_sched() and synchronize_rcu_bh() to return +immediately on an UP system. It is also safe for synchronize_rcu() +to return immediately on UP systems, except when running preemptable +RCU. + +Quick Quiz #3: Why can't synchronize_rcu() return immediately on + UP systems running preemptable RCU? Answer to Quick Quiz #1: @@ -117,3 +123,13 @@ Answer to Quick Quiz #2: callbacks acquire locks directly. However, a great many RCU callbacks do acquire locks -indirectly-, for example, via the kfree() primitive. + +Answer to Quick Quiz #3: + Why can't synchronize_rcu() return immediately on UP systems + running preemptable RCU? + + Because some other task might have been preempted in the middle + of an RCU read-side critical section. If synchronize_rcu() + simply immediately returned, it would prematurely signal the + end of the grace period, which would come as a nasty shock to + that other thread when it started running again. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt index accfe2f5247..51525a30e8b 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt @@ -11,7 +11,10 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! structure is updated more than about 10% of the time, then you should strongly consider some other approach, unless detailed performance measurements show that RCU is nonetheless - the right tool for the job. + the right tool for the job. Yes, you might think of RCU + as simply cutting overhead off of the readers and imposing it + on the writers. That is exactly why normal uses of RCU will + do much more reading than updating. Another exception is where performance is not an issue, and RCU provides a simpler implementation. An example of this situation @@ -240,10 +243,11 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! instead need to use synchronize_irq() or synchronize_sched(). 12. Any lock acquired by an RCU callback must be acquired elsewhere - with irq disabled, e.g., via spin_lock_irqsave(). Failing to - disable irq on a given acquisition of that lock will result in - deadlock as soon as the RCU callback happens to interrupt that - acquisition's critical section. + with softirq disabled, e.g., via spin_lock_irqsave(), + spin_lock_bh(), etc. Failing to disable irq on a given + acquisition of that lock will result in deadlock as soon as the + RCU callback happens to interrupt that acquisition's critical + section. 13. RCU callbacks can be and are executed in parallel. In many cases, the callback code simply wrappers around kfree(), so that this @@ -310,3 +314,9 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! Because these primitives only wait for pre-existing readers, it is the caller's responsibility to guarantee safety to any subsequent readers. + +16. The various RCU read-side primitives do -not- contain memory + barriers. The CPU (and in some cases, the compiler) is free + to reorder code into and out of RCU read-side critical sections. + It is the responsibility of the RCU update-side primitives to + deal with this. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt index 7aa2002ade7..2a23523ce47 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ o How can the updater tell when a grace period has completed executed in user mode, or executed in the idle loop, we can safely free up that item. - Preemptible variants of RCU (CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU) get the + Preemptible variants of RCU (CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU) get the same effect, but require that the readers manipulate CPU-local counters. These counters allow limited types of blocking within RCU read-side critical sections. SRCU also uses @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ o I hear that RCU is patented? What is with that? o I hear that RCU needs work in order to support realtime kernels? This work is largely completed. Realtime-friendly RCU can be - enabled via the CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU kernel configuration parameter. - However, work is in progress for enabling priority boosting of - preempted RCU read-side critical sections. This is needed if you - have CPU-bound realtime threads. + enabled via the CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernel configuration + parameter. However, work is in progress for enabling priority + boosting of preempted RCU read-side critical sections. This is + needed if you have CPU-bound realtime threads. o Where can I find more information on RCU? diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt index 909602d409b..e439a0edee2 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt @@ -170,6 +170,13 @@ module invokes call_rcu() from timers, you will need to first cancel all the timers, and only then invoke rcu_barrier() to wait for any remaining RCU callbacks to complete. +Of course, if you module uses call_rcu_bh(), you will need to invoke +rcu_barrier_bh() before unloading. Similarly, if your module uses +call_rcu_sched(), you will need to invoke rcu_barrier_sched() before +unloading. If your module uses call_rcu(), call_rcu_bh(), -and- +call_rcu_sched(), then you will need to invoke each of rcu_barrier(), +rcu_barrier_bh(), and rcu_barrier_sched(). + Implementing rcu_barrier() diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt index a342b6e1cc1..9dba3bb90e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt @@ -76,8 +76,10 @@ torture_type The type of RCU to test: "rcu" for the rcu_read_lock() API, "rcu_sync" for rcu_read_lock() with synchronous reclamation, "rcu_bh" for the rcu_read_lock_bh() API, "rcu_bh_sync" for rcu_read_lock_bh() with synchronous reclamation, "srcu" for - the "srcu_read_lock()" API, and "sched" for the use of - preempt_disable() together with synchronize_sched(). + the "srcu_read_lock()" API, "sched" for the use of + preempt_disable() together with synchronize_sched(), + and "sched_expedited" for the use of preempt_disable() + with synchronize_sched_expedited(). verbose Enable debug printk()s. Default is disabled. @@ -162,6 +164,23 @@ of the "old" and "current" counters for the corresponding CPU. The "idx" value maps the "old" and "current" values to the underlying array, and is useful for debugging. +Similarly, sched_expedited RCU provides the following: + + sched_expedited-torture: rtc: d0000000016c1880 ver: 1090796 tfle: 0 rta: 1090796 rtaf: 0 rtf: 1090787 rtmbe: 0 nt: 27713319 + sched_expedited-torture: Reader Pipe: 12660320201 95875 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + sched_expedited-torture: Reader Batch: 12660424885 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + sched_expedited-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 1090795 1090795 1090794 1090793 1090792 1090791 1090790 1090789 1090788 1090787 0 + state: -1 / 0:0 3:0 4:0 + +As before, the first four lines are similar to those for RCU. +The last line shows the task-migration state. The first number is +-1 if synchronize_sched_expedited() is idle, -2 if in the process of +posting wakeups to the migration kthreads, and N when waiting on CPU N. +Each of the colon-separated fields following the "/" is a CPU:state pair. +Valid states are "0" for idle, "1" for waiting for quiescent state, +"2" for passed through quiescent state, and "3" when a race with a +CPU-hotplug event forces use of the synchronize_sched() primitive. + USAGE diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index 02cced183b2..187bbf10c92 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -191,8 +191,7 @@ rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy). The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: -rcu: -rcu: +rcu_sched: 0 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=10951/1 dn=0 df=1101 of=0 ri=36 ql=0 b=10 1 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=16117/1 dn=0 df=1015 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 2 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=1445/1 dn=0 df=1839 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 @@ -306,7 +305,7 @@ comma-separated-variable spreadsheet format. The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows: -rcu: completed=33062 gpnum=33063 +rcu_sched: completed=33062 gpnum=33063 rcu_bh: completed=464 gpnum=464 Again, this output is for both "rcu" and "rcu_bh". The fields are @@ -413,7 +412,7 @@ o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct The output of "cat rcu/rcu_pending" looks as follows: -rcu: +rcu_sched: 0 np=255892 qsp=53936 cbr=0 cng=14417 gpc=10033 gps=24320 nf=6445 nn=146741 1 np=261224 qsp=54638 cbr=0 cng=25723 gpc=16310 gps=2849 nf=5912 nn=155792 2 np=237496 qsp=49664 cbr=0 cng=2762 gpc=45478 gps=1762 nf=1201 nn=136629 diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index 96170824a71..e41a7fecf0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ rcu_read_lock() Used by a reader to inform the reclaimer that the reader is entering an RCU read-side critical section. It is illegal to block while in an RCU read-side critical section, though - kernels built with CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU can preempt RCU read-side - critical sections. Any RCU-protected data structure accessed - during an RCU read-side critical section is guaranteed to remain - unreclaimed for the full duration of that critical section. + kernels built with CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU can preempt RCU + read-side critical sections. Any RCU-protected data structure + accessed during an RCU read-side critical section is guaranteed to + remain unreclaimed for the full duration of that critical section. Reference counts may be used in conjunction with RCU to maintain longer-term references to data structures. @@ -785,6 +785,7 @@ RCU pointer/list traversal: rcu_dereference list_for_each_entry_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_rcu + hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu list_for_each_continue_rcu (to be deprecated in favor of new list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu) @@ -807,19 +808,23 @@ RCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock synchronize_net rcu_barrier rcu_read_unlock synchronize_rcu + synchronize_rcu_expedited call_rcu bh: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock_bh call_rcu_bh rcu_barrier_bh - rcu_read_unlock_bh + rcu_read_unlock_bh synchronize_rcu_bh + synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited sched: Critical sections Grace period Barrier - [preempt_disable] synchronize_sched rcu_barrier_sched - [and friends] call_rcu_sched + rcu_read_lock_sched synchronize_sched rcu_barrier_sched + rcu_read_unlock_sched call_rcu_sched + [preempt_disable] synchronize_sched_expedited + [and friends] SRCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier @@ -827,6 +832,9 @@ SRCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier srcu_read_lock synchronize_srcu N/A srcu_read_unlock +SRCU: Initialization/cleanup + init_srcu_struct + cleanup_srcu_struct See the comment headers in the source code (or the docbook generated from them) for more information. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5389440aade --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + +The OMAP PM interface +===================== + +This document describes the temporary OMAP PM interface. Driver +authors use these functions to communicate minimum latency or +throughput constraints to the kernel power management code. +Over time, the intention is to merge features from the OMAP PM +interface into the Linux PM QoS code. + +Drivers need to express PM parameters which: + +- support the range of power management parameters present in the TI SRF; + +- separate the drivers from the underlying PM parameter + implementation, whether it is the TI SRF or Linux PM QoS or Linux + latency framework or something else; + +- specify PM parameters in terms of fundamental units, such as + latency and throughput, rather than units which are specific to OMAP + or to particular OMAP variants; + +- allow drivers which are shared with other architectures (e.g., + DaVinci) to add these constraints in a way which won't affect non-OMAP + systems, + +- can be implemented immediately with minimal disruption of other + architectures. + + +This document proposes the OMAP PM interface, including the following +five power management functions for driver code: + +1. Set the maximum MPU wakeup latency: + (*pdata->set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat)(struct device *dev, unsigned long t) + +2. Set the maximum device wakeup latency: + (*pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)(struct device *dev, unsigned long t) + +3. Set the maximum system DMA transfer start latency (CORE pwrdm): + (*pdata->set_max_sdma_lat)(struct device *dev, long t) + +4. Set the minimum bus throughput needed by a device: + (*pdata->set_min_bus_tput)(struct device *dev, u8 agent_id, unsigned long r) + +5. Return the number of times the device has lost context + (*pdata->get_dev_context_loss_count)(struct device *dev) + + +Further documentation for all OMAP PM interface functions can be +found in arch/arm/plat-omap/include/mach/omap-pm.h. + + +The OMAP PM layer is intended to be temporary +--------------------------------------------- + +The intention is that eventually the Linux PM QoS layer should support +the range of power management features present in OMAP3. As this +happens, existing drivers using the OMAP PM interface can be modified +to use the Linux PM QoS code; and the OMAP PM interface can disappear. + + +Driver usage of the OMAP PM functions +------------------------------------- + +As the 'pdata' in the above examples indicates, these functions are +exposed to drivers through function pointers in driver .platform_data +structures. The function pointers are initialized by the board-*.c +files to point to the corresponding OMAP PM functions: +.set_max_dev_wakeup_lat will point to +omap_pm_set_max_dev_wakeup_lat(), etc. Other architectures which do +not support these functions should leave these function pointers set +to NULL. Drivers should use the following idiom: + + if (pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat) + (*pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)(dev, t); + +The most common usage of these functions will probably be to specify +the maximum time from when an interrupt occurs, to when the device +becomes accessible. To accomplish this, driver writers should use the +set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat() function to to constrain the MPU wakeup +latency, and the set_max_dev_wakeup_lat() function to constrain the +device wakeup latency (from clk_enable() to accessibility). For +example, + + /* Limit MPU wakeup latency */ + if (pdata->set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat) + (*pdata->set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat)(dev, tc); + + /* Limit device powerdomain wakeup latency */ + if (pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat) + (*pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)(dev, td); + + /* total wakeup latency in this example: (tc + td) */ + +The PM parameters can be overwritten by calling the function again +with the new value. The settings can be removed by calling the +function with a t argument of -1 (except in the case of +set_max_bus_tput(), which should be called with an r argument of 0). + +The fifth function above, omap_pm_get_dev_context_loss_count(), +is intended as an optimization to allow drivers to determine whether the +device has lost its internal context. If context has been lost, the +driver must restore its internal context before proceeding. + + +Other specialized interface functions +------------------------------------- + +The five functions listed above are intended to be usable by any +device driver. DSPBridge and CPUFreq have a few special requirements. +DSPBridge expresses target DSP performance levels in terms of OPP IDs. +CPUFreq expresses target MPU performance levels in terms of MPU +frequency. The OMAP PM interface contains functions for these +specialized cases to convert that input information (OPPs/MPU +frequency) into the form that the underlying power management +implementation needs: + +6. (*pdata->dsp_get_opp_table)(void) + +7. (*pdata->dsp_set_min_opp)(u8 opp_id) + +8. (*pdata->dsp_get_opp)(void) + +9. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq_table)(void) + +10. (*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f) + +11. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void) diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy index ab47c383390..7197a9e958e 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy +++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy @@ -40,4 +40,4 @@ Notes: mode, the timing is off so the image is corrupted. This will be fixed soon. -Any contribution can be sent to nico@cam.org and will be greatly welcome! +Any contribution can be sent to nico@fluxnic.net and will be greatly welcome! diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet index 78bc1c1b04e..91f7ce7ba42 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet +++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Then, rebooting the Assabet is just a matter of waiting for the login prompt. Nicolas Pitre -nico@cam.org +nico@fluxnic.net June 12, 2001 diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus index 2254c8f0b32..b1cfd405dcc 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus +++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ little modifications. Any contribution is welcome. -Please send patches to nico@cam.org +Please send patches to nico@fluxnic.net Have Fun ! diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient index 8fa7e8027ff..6c9c4f5a36e 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient +++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see http://www.applieddata.net/products.html The original Linux support for this product has been provided by -Nicolas Pitre <nico@cam.org>. Continued development work by +Nicolas Pitre <nico@fluxnic.net>. Continued development work by Woojung Huh <whuh@applieddata.net> It's currently possible to mount a root filesystem via NFS providing a @@ -94,5 +94,5 @@ Notes: mode, the timing is off so the image is corrupted. This will be fixed soon. -Any contribution can be sent to nico@cam.org and will be greatly welcome! +Any contribution can be sent to nico@fluxnic.net and will be greatly welcome! diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster index dd28745ac52..ee7c6595f23 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster +++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see http://www.applieddata.net/products.html The original Linux support for this product has been provided by -Nicolas Pitre <nico@cam.org>. Continued development work by +Nicolas Pitre <nico@fluxnic.net>. Continued development work by Woojung Huh <whuh@applieddata.net> Use 'make graphicsmaster_config' before any 'make config'. @@ -50,4 +50,4 @@ Notes: mode, the timing is off so the image is corrupted. This will be fixed soon. -Any contribution can be sent to nico@cam.org and will be greatly welcome! +Any contribution can be sent to nico@fluxnic.net and will be greatly welcome! diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Victor b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Victor index 01e81fc4946..f938a29fdc2 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Victor +++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Victor @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Of course Victor is using Linux as its main operating system. The Victor implementation for Linux is maintained by Nicolas Pitre: nico@visuaide.com - nico@cam.org + nico@fluxnic.net For any comments, please feel free to contact me through the above addresses. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..76b3a11e90b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + S3C24XX CPUfreq support + ======================= + +Introduction +------------ + + The S3C24XX series support a number of power saving systems, such as + the ability to change the core, memory and peripheral operating + frequencies. The core control is exported via the CPUFreq driver + which has a number of different manual or automatic controls over the + rate the core is running at. + + There are two forms of the driver depending on the specific CPU and + how the clocks are arranged. The first implementation used as single + PLL to feed the ARM, memory and peripherals via a series of dividers + and muxes and this is the implementation that is documented here. A + newer version where there is a seperate PLL and clock divider for the + ARM core is available as a seperate driver. + + +Layout +------ + + The code core manages the CPU specific drivers, any data that they + need to register and the interface to the generic drivers/cpufreq + system. Each CPU registers a driver to control the PLL, clock dividers + and anything else associated with it. Any board that wants to use this + framework needs to supply at least basic details of what is required. + + The core registers with drivers/cpufreq at init time if all the data + necessary has been supplied. + + +CPU support +----------- + + The support for each CPU depends on the facilities provided by the + SoC and the driver as each device has different PLL and clock chains + associated with it. + + +Slow Mode +--------- + + The SLOW mode where the PLL is turned off altogether and the + system is fed by the external crystal input is currently not + supported. + + +sysfs +----- + + The core code exports extra information via sysfs in the directory + devices/system/cpu/cpu0/arch-freq. + + +Board Support +------------- + + Each board that wants to use the cpufreq code must register some basic + information with the core driver to provide information about what the + board requires and any restrictions being placed on it. + + The board needs to supply information about whether it needs the IO bank + timings changing, any maximum frequency limits and information about the + SDRAM refresh rate. + + + + +Document Author +--------------- + +Ben Dooks, Copyright 2009 Simtec Electronics +Licensed under GPLv2 diff --git a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt index 43cb1004d35..9d58c7c5edd 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt @@ -21,6 +21,8 @@ ffff8000 ffffffff copy_user_page / clear_user_page use. For SA11xx and Xscale, this is used to setup a minicache mapping. +ffff4000 ffffffff cache aliasing on ARMv6 and later CPUs. + ffff1000 ffff7fff Reserved. Platforms must not use this address range. diff --git a/Documentation/btmrvl.txt b/Documentation/btmrvl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..34916a46c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/btmrvl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +======================================================================= + README for btmrvl driver +======================================================================= + + +All commands are used via debugfs interface. + +===================== +Set/get driver configurations: + +Path: /debug/btmrvl/config/ + +gpiogap=[n] +hscfgcmd + These commands are used to configure the host sleep parameters. + bit 8:0 -- Gap + bit 16:8 -- GPIO + + where GPIO is the pin number of GPIO used to wake up the host. + It could be any valid GPIO pin# (e.g. 0-7) or 0xff (SDIO interface + wakeup will be used instead). + + where Gap is the gap in milli seconds between wakeup signal and + wakeup event, or 0xff for special host sleep setting. + + Usage: + # Use SDIO interface to wake up the host and set GAP to 0x80: + echo 0xff80 > /debug/btmrvl/config/gpiogap + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscfgcmd + + # Use GPIO pin #3 to wake up the host and set GAP to 0xff: + echo 0x03ff > /debug/btmrvl/config/gpiogap + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscfgcmd + +psmode=[n] +pscmd + These commands are used to enable/disable auto sleep mode + + where the option is: + 1 -- Enable auto sleep mode + 0 -- Disable auto sleep mode + + Usage: + # Enable auto sleep mode + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/psmode + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/pscmd + + # Disable auto sleep mode + echo 0 > /debug/btmrvl/config/psmode + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/pscmd + + +hsmode=[n] +hscmd + These commands are used to enable host sleep or wake up firmware + + where the option is: + 1 -- Enable host sleep + 0 -- Wake up firmware + + Usage: + # Enable host sleep + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hsmode + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscmd + + # Wake up firmware + echo 0 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hsmode + echo 1 > /debug/btmrvl/config/hscmd + + +====================== +Get driver status: + +Path: /debug/btmrvl/status/ + +Usage: + cat /debug/btmrvl/status/<args> + +where the args are: + +curpsmode + This command displays current auto sleep status. + +psstate + This command display the power save state. + +hsstate + This command display the host sleep state. + +txdnldrdy + This command displays the value of Tx download ready flag. + + +===================== + +Use hcitool to issue raw hci command, refer to hcitool manual + + Usage: Hcitool cmd <ogf> <ocf> [Parameters] + + Interface Control Command + hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x00 --Enable All interface + hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x01 --Enable Wlan interface + hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x01 0x02 --Enable BT interface + hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x00 0x00 --Disable All interface + hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x00 0x01 --Disable Wlan interface + hcitool cmd 0x3f 0x5b 0xf5 0x00 0x02 --Disable BT interface + +======================================================================= + + +SD8688 firmware: + +/lib/firmware/sd8688_helper.bin +/lib/firmware/sd8688.bin + + +The images can be downloaded from: + +git.infradead.org/users/dwmw2/linux-firmware.git/libertas/ diff --git a/Documentation/connector/Makefile b/Documentation/connector/Makefile index 8df1a7285a0..d98e4df98e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/connector/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/connector/Makefile @@ -9,3 +9,8 @@ hostprogs-y := ucon always := $(hostprogs-y) HOSTCFLAGS_ucon.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include + +all: modules + +modules clean: + $(MAKE) -C ../.. SUBDIRS=$(PWD) $@ diff --git a/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c b/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c index 6a5be5d5c8e..1711adc3337 100644 --- a/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c +++ b/Documentation/connector/cn_test.c @@ -19,6 +19,8 @@ * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA */ +#define pr_fmt(fmt) "cn_test: " fmt + #include <linux/kernel.h> #include <linux/module.h> #include <linux/moduleparam.h> @@ -27,18 +29,17 @@ #include <linux/connector.h> -static struct cb_id cn_test_id = { 0x123, 0x456 }; +static struct cb_id cn_test_id = { CN_NETLINK_USERS + 3, 0x456 }; static char cn_test_name[] = "cn_test"; static struct sock *nls; static struct timer_list cn_test_timer; -void cn_test_callback(void *data) +static void cn_test_callback(struct cn_msg *msg) { - struct cn_msg *msg = (struct cn_msg *)data; - - printk("%s: %lu: idx=%x, val=%x, seq=%u, ack=%u, len=%d: %s.\n", - __func__, jiffies, msg->id.idx, msg->id.val, - msg->seq, msg->ack, msg->len, (char *)msg->data); + pr_info("%s: %lu: idx=%x, val=%x, seq=%u, ack=%u, len=%d: %s.\n", + __func__, jiffies, msg->id.idx, msg->id.val, + msg->seq, msg->ack, msg->len, + msg->len ? (char *)msg->data : ""); } /* @@ -63,9 +64,7 @@ static int cn_test_want_notify(void) skb = alloc_skb(size, GFP_ATOMIC); if (!skb) { - printk(KERN_ERR "Failed to allocate new skb with size=%u.\n", - size); - + pr_err("failed to allocate new skb with size=%u\n", size); return -ENOMEM; } @@ -114,12 +113,12 @@ static int cn_test_want_notify(void) //netlink_broadcast(nls, skb, 0, ctl->group, GFP_ATOMIC); netlink_unicast(nls, skb, 0, 0); - printk(KERN_INFO "Request was sent. Group=0x%x.\n", ctl->group); + pr_info("request was sent: group=0x%x\n", ctl->group); return 0; nlmsg_failure: - printk(KERN_ERR "Failed to send %u.%u\n", msg->seq, msg->ack); + pr_err("failed to send %u.%u\n", msg->seq, msg->ack); kfree_skb(skb); return -EINVAL; } @@ -131,6 +130,8 @@ static void cn_test_timer_func(unsigned long __data) struct cn_msg *m; char data[32]; + pr_debug("%s: timer fired with data %lu\n", __func__, __data); + m = kzalloc(sizeof(*m) + sizeof(data), GFP_ATOMIC); if (m) { @@ -150,7 +151,7 @@ static void cn_test_timer_func(unsigned long __data) cn_test_timer_counter++; - mod_timer(&cn_test_timer, jiffies + HZ); + mod_timer(&cn_test_timer, jiffies + msecs_to_jiffies(1000)); } static int cn_test_init(void) @@ -168,8 +169,10 @@ static int cn_test_init(void) } setup_timer(&cn_test_timer, cn_test_timer_func, 0); - cn_test_timer.expires = jiffies + HZ; - add_timer(&cn_test_timer); + mod_timer(&cn_test_timer, jiffies + msecs_to_jiffies(1000)); + + pr_info("initialized with id={%u.%u}\n", + cn_test_id.idx, cn_test_id.val); return 0; diff --git a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt b/Documentation/connector/connector.txt index ad6e0ba7b38..81e6bf6ead5 100644 --- a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt +++ b/Documentation/connector/connector.txt @@ -5,10 +5,10 @@ Kernel Connector. Kernel connector - new netlink based userspace <-> kernel space easy to use communication module. -Connector driver adds possibility to connect various agents using -netlink based network. One must register callback and -identifier. When driver receives special netlink message with -appropriate identifier, appropriate callback will be called. +The Connector driver makes it easy to connect various agents using a +netlink based network. One must register a callback and an identifier. +When the driver receives a special netlink message with the appropriate +identifier, the appropriate callback will be called. From the userspace point of view it's quite straightforward: @@ -17,10 +17,10 @@ From the userspace point of view it's quite straightforward: send(); recv(); -But if kernelspace want to use full power of such connections, driver -writer must create special sockets, must know about struct sk_buff -handling... Connector allows any kernelspace agents to use netlink -based networking for inter-process communication in a significantly +But if kernelspace wants to use the full power of such connections, the +driver writer must create special sockets, must know about struct sk_buff +handling, etc... The Connector driver allows any kernelspace agents to use +netlink based networking for inter-process communication in a significantly easier way: int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (void *)); @@ -32,15 +32,15 @@ struct cb_id __u32 val; }; -idx and val are unique identifiers which must be registered in -connector.h for in-kernel usage. void (*callback) (void *) - is a -callback function which will be called when message with above idx.val -will be received by connector core. Argument for that function must +idx and val are unique identifiers which must be registered in the +connector.h header for in-kernel usage. void (*callback) (void *) is a +callback function which will be called when a message with above idx.val +is received by the connector core. The argument for that function must be dereferenced to struct cn_msg *. struct cn_msg { - struct cb_id id; + struct cb_id id; __u32 seq; __u32 ack; @@ -55,92 +55,95 @@ Connector interfaces. int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (void *)); -Registers new callback with connector core. + Registers new callback with connector core. -struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier. - It must be registered in connector.h for legal in-kernel users. -char *name - connector's callback symbolic name. -void (*callback) (void *) - connector's callback. + struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier. + It must be registered in connector.h for legal in-kernel users. + char *name - connector's callback symbolic name. + void (*callback) (void *) - connector's callback. Argument must be dereferenced to struct cn_msg *. + void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *id); -Unregisters new callback with connector core. + Unregisters new callback with connector core. + + struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier. -struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier. int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask); -Sends message to the specified groups. It can be safely called from -softirq context, but may silently fail under strong memory pressure. -If there are no listeners for given group -ESRCH can be returned. + Sends message to the specified groups. It can be safely called from + softirq context, but may silently fail under strong memory pressure. + If there are no listeners for given group -ESRCH can be returned. -struct cn_msg * - message header(with attached data). -u32 __group - destination group. + struct cn_msg * - message header(with attached data). + u32 __group - destination group. If __group is zero, then appropriate group will be searched through all registered connector users, and message will be delivered to the group which was created for user with the same ID as in msg. If __group is not zero, then message will be delivered to the specified group. -int gfp_mask - GFP mask. + int gfp_mask - GFP mask. -Note: When registering new callback user, connector core assigns -netlink group to the user which is equal to it's id.idx. + Note: When registering new callback user, connector core assigns + netlink group to the user which is equal to it's id.idx. /*****************************************/ Protocol description. /*****************************************/ -Current offers transport layer with fixed header. Recommended -protocol which uses such header is following: +The current framework offers a transport layer with fixed headers. The +recommended protocol which uses such a header is as following: msg->seq and msg->ack are used to determine message genealogy. When -someone sends message it puts there locally unique sequence and random -acknowledge numbers. Sequence number may be copied into +someone sends a message, they use a locally unique sequence and random +acknowledge number. The sequence number may be copied into nlmsghdr->nlmsg_seq too. -Sequence number is incremented with each message to be sent. +The sequence number is incremented with each message sent. -If we expect reply to our message, then sequence number in received -message MUST be the same as in original message, and acknowledge -number MUST be the same + 1. +If you expect a reply to the message, then the sequence number in the +received message MUST be the same as in the original message, and the +acknowledge number MUST be the same + 1. -If we receive message and it's sequence number is not equal to one we -are expecting, then it is new message. If we receive message and it's -sequence number is the same as one we are expecting, but it's -acknowledge is not equal acknowledge number in original message + 1, -then it is new message. +If we receive a message and its sequence number is not equal to one we +are expecting, then it is a new message. If we receive a message and +its sequence number is the same as one we are expecting, but its +acknowledge is not equal to the acknowledge number in the original +message + 1, then it is a new message. -Obviously, protocol header contains above id. +Obviously, the protocol header contains the above id. -connector allows event notification in the following form: kernel +The connector allows event notification in the following form: kernel driver or userspace process can ask connector to notify it when -selected id's will be turned on or off(registered or unregistered it's -callback). It is done by sending special command to connector -driver(it also registers itself with id={-1, -1}). +selected ids will be turned on or off (registered or unregistered its +callback). It is done by sending a special command to the connector +driver (it also registers itself with id={-1, -1}). -As example of usage Documentation/connector now contains cn_test.c - -testing module which uses connector to request notification and to -send messages. +As example of this usage can be found in the cn_test.c module which +uses the connector to request notification and to send messages. /*****************************************/ Reliability. /*****************************************/ -Netlink itself is not reliable protocol, that means that messages can +Netlink itself is not a reliable protocol. That means that messages can be lost due to memory pressure or process' receiving queue overflowed, -so caller is warned must be prepared. That is why struct cn_msg [main -connector's message header] contains u32 seq and u32 ack fields. +so caller is warned that it must be prepared. That is why the struct +cn_msg [main connector's message header] contains u32 seq and u32 ack +fields. /*****************************************/ Userspace usage. /*****************************************/ + 2.6.14 has a new netlink socket implementation, which by default does not -allow to send data to netlink groups other than 1. -So, if to use netlink socket (for example using connector) -with different group number userspace application must subscribe to -that group. It can be achieved by following pseudocode: +allow people to send data to netlink groups other than 1. +So, if you wish to use a netlink socket (for example using connector) +with a different group number, the userspace application must subscribe to +that group first. It can be achieved by the following pseudocode: s = socket(PF_NETLINK, SOCK_DGRAM, NETLINK_CONNECTOR); @@ -160,8 +163,8 @@ if (bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&l_local, sizeof(struct sockaddr_nl)) == -1) { } Where 270 above is SOL_NETLINK, and 1 is a NETLINK_ADD_MEMBERSHIP socket -option. To drop multicast subscription one should call above socket option -with NETLINK_DROP_MEMBERSHIP parameter which is defined as 0. +option. To drop a multicast subscription, one should call the above socket +option with the NETLINK_DROP_MEMBERSHIP parameter which is defined as 0. 2.6.14 netlink code only allows to select a group which is less or equal to the maximum group number, which is used at netlink_kernel_create() time. diff --git a/Documentation/connector/ucon.c b/Documentation/connector/ucon.c index c5092ad0ce4..4848db8c71f 100644 --- a/Documentation/connector/ucon.c +++ b/Documentation/connector/ucon.c @@ -30,18 +30,24 @@ #include <arpa/inet.h> +#include <stdbool.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <string.h> #include <errno.h> #include <time.h> +#include <getopt.h> #include <linux/connector.h> #define DEBUG #define NETLINK_CONNECTOR 11 +/* Hopefully your userspace connector.h matches this kernel */ +#define CN_TEST_IDX CN_NETLINK_USERS + 3 +#define CN_TEST_VAL 0x456 + #ifdef DEBUG #define ulog(f, a...) fprintf(stdout, f, ##a) #else @@ -83,6 +89,25 @@ static int netlink_send(int s, struct cn_msg *msg) return err; } +static void usage(void) +{ + printf( + "Usage: ucon [options] [output file]\n" + "\n" + "\t-h\tthis help screen\n" + "\t-s\tsend buffers to the test module\n" + "\n" + "The default behavior of ucon is to subscribe to the test module\n" + "and wait for state messages. Any ones received are dumped to the\n" + "specified output file (or stdout). The test module is assumed to\n" + "have an id of {%u.%u}\n" + "\n" + "If you get no output, then verify the cn_test module id matches\n" + "the expected id above.\n" + , CN_TEST_IDX, CN_TEST_VAL + ); +} + int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { int s; @@ -94,17 +119,34 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) FILE *out; time_t tm; struct pollfd pfd; + bool send_msgs = false; - if (argc < 2) - out = stdout; - else { - out = fopen(argv[1], "a+"); + while ((s = getopt(argc, argv, "hs")) != -1) { + switch (s) { + case 's': + send_msgs = true; + break; + + case 'h': + usage(); + return 0; + + default: + /* getopt() outputs an error for us */ + usage(); + return 1; + } + } + + if (argc != optind) { + out = fopen(argv[optind], "a+"); if (!out) { ulog("Unable to open %s for writing: %s\n", argv[1], strerror(errno)); out = stdout; } - } + } else + out = stdout; memset(buf, 0, sizeof(buf)); @@ -115,9 +157,11 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) } l_local.nl_family = AF_NETLINK; - l_local.nl_groups = 0x123; /* bitmask of requested groups */ + l_local.nl_groups = -1; /* bitmask of requested groups */ l_local.nl_pid = 0; + ulog("subscribing to %u.%u\n", CN_TEST_IDX, CN_TEST_VAL); + if (bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&l_local, sizeof(struct sockaddr_nl)) == -1) { perror("bind"); close(s); @@ -130,15 +174,15 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) setsockopt(s, SOL_NETLINK, NETLINK_ADD_MEMBERSHIP, &on, sizeof(on)); } #endif - if (0) { + if (send_msgs) { int i, j; memset(buf, 0, sizeof(buf)); data = (struct cn_msg *)buf; - data->id.idx = 0x123; - data->id.val = 0x456; + data->id.idx = CN_TEST_IDX; + data->id.val = CN_TEST_VAL; data->seq = seq++; data->ack = 0; data->len = 0; diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt index 5d5f5fadd1c..2a5b850847c 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt @@ -176,7 +176,9 @@ scaling_governor, and by "echoing" the name of another work on some specific architectures or processors. -cpuinfo_cur_freq : Current speed of the CPU, in KHz. +cpuinfo_cur_freq : Current frequency of the CPU as obtained from + the hardware, in KHz. This is the frequency + the CPU actually runs at. scaling_available_frequencies : List of available frequencies, in KHz. @@ -196,7 +198,10 @@ related_cpus : List of CPUs that need some sort of frequency scaling_driver : Hardware driver for cpufreq. -scaling_cur_freq : Current frequency of the CPU, in KHz. +scaling_cur_freq : Current frequency of the CPU as determined by + the governor and cpufreq core, in KHz. This is + the frequency the kernel thinks the CPU runs + at. If you have selected the "userspace" governor which allows you to set the CPU operating frequency to a specific value, you can read out diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index 88519daab6e..e1efc400bed 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -152,7 +152,6 @@ piggy.gz piggyback pnmtologo ppc_defs.h* -promcon_tbl.c pss_boot.h qconf raid6altivec*.c diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 09e031c5588..fa75220f8d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -6,6 +6,35 @@ be removed from this file. --------------------------- +What: PRISM54 +When: 2.6.34 + +Why: prism54 FullMAC PCI / Cardbus devices used to be supported only by the + prism54 wireless driver. After Intersil stopped selling these + devices in preference for the newer more flexible SoftMAC devices + a SoftMAC device driver was required and prism54 did not support + them. The p54pci driver now exists and has been present in the kernel for + a while. This driver supports both SoftMAC devices and FullMAC devices. + The main difference between these devices was the amount of memory which + could be used for the firmware. The SoftMAC devices support a smaller + amount of memory. Because of this the SoftMAC firmware fits into FullMAC + devices's memory. p54pci supports not only PCI / Cardbus but also USB + and SPI. Since p54pci supports all devices prism54 supports + you will have a conflict. I'm not quite sure how distributions are + handling this conflict right now. prism54 was kept around due to + claims users may experience issues when using the SoftMAC driver. + Time has passed users have not reported issues. If you use prism54 + and for whatever reason you cannot use p54pci please let us know! + E-mail us at: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org + + For more information see the p54 wiki page: + + http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Drivers/p54 + +Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> + +--------------------------- + What: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM Check: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM When: July 2009 @@ -206,24 +235,6 @@ Who: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> --------------------------- -What: libata spindown skipping and warning -When: Dec 2008 -Why: Some halt(8) implementations synchronize caches for and spin - down libata disks because libata didn't use to spin down disk on - system halt (only synchronized caches). - Spin down on system halt is now implemented. sysfs node - /sys/class/scsi_disk/h:c:i:l/manage_start_stop is present if - spin down support is available. - Because issuing spin down command to an already spun down disk - makes some disks spin up just to spin down again, libata tracks - device spindown status to skip the extra spindown command and - warn about it. - This is to give userspace tools the time to get updated and will - be removed after userspace is reasonably updated. -Who: Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com> - ---------------------------- - What: i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks When: April 2010 @@ -235,31 +246,6 @@ Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> --------------------------- What (Why): - - include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_TOS.h ipt_tos.h header files - (superseded by xt_TOS/xt_tos target & match) - - - "forwarding" header files like ipt_mac.h in - include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ and include/linux/netfilter_ipv6/ - - - xt_CONNMARK match revision 0 - (superseded by xt_CONNMARK match revision 1) - - - xt_MARK target revisions 0 and 1 - (superseded by xt_MARK match revision 2) - - - xt_connmark match revision 0 - (superseded by xt_connmark match revision 1) - - - xt_conntrack match revision 0 - (superseded by xt_conntrack match revision 1) - - - xt_iprange match revision 0, - include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_iprange.h - (superseded by xt_iprange match revision 1) - - - xt_mark match revision 0 - (superseded by xt_mark match revision 1) - - xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent) @@ -394,15 +380,6 @@ Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> ----------------------------- -What: obsolete generic irq defines and typedefs -When: 2.6.30 -Why: The defines and typedefs (hw_interrupt_type, no_irq_type, irq_desc_t) - have been kept around for migration reasons. After more than two years - it's time to remove them finally -Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> - ---------------------------- - What: fakephp and associated sysfs files in /sys/bus/pci/slots/ When: 2011 Why: In 2.6.27, the semantics of /sys/bus/pci/slots was redefined to @@ -451,16 +428,6 @@ Who: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> ---------------------------- -What: CONFIG_X86_OLD_MCE -When: 2.6.32 -Why: Remove the old legacy 32bit machine check code. This has been - superseded by the newer machine check code from the 64bit port, - but the old version has been kept around for easier testing. Note this - doesn't impact the old P5 and WinChip machine check handlers. -Who: Andi Kleen <andi@firstfloor.org> - ----------------------------- - What: lock_policy_rwsem_* and unlock_policy_rwsem_* will not be exported interface anymore. When: 2.6.33 @@ -468,3 +435,27 @@ Why: cpu_policy_rwsem has a new cleaner definition making it local to cpufreq core and contained inside cpufreq.c. Other dependent drivers should not use it in order to safely avoid lockdep issues. Who: Venkatesh Pallipadi <venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com> + +---------------------------- + +What: sound-slot/service-* module aliases and related clutters in + sound/sound_core.c +When: August 2010 +Why: OSS sound_core grabs all legacy minors (0-255) of SOUND_MAJOR + (14) and requests modules using custom sound-slot/service-* + module aliases. The only benefit of doing this is allowing + use of custom module aliases which might as well be considered + a bug at this point. This preemptive claiming prevents + alternative OSS implementations. + + Till the feature is removed, the kernel will be requesting + both sound-slot/service-* and the standard char-major-* module + aliases and allow turning off the pre-claiming selectively via + CONFIG_SOUND_OSS_CORE_PRECLAIM and soundcore.preclaim_oss + kernel parameter. + + After the transition phase is complete, both the custom module + aliases and switches to disable it will go away. This removal + will also allow making ALSA OSS emulation independent of + sound_core. The dependency will be broken then too. +Who: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt index bf8080640eb..6208f55c44c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt @@ -123,6 +123,9 @@ available from the same CVS repository. There are user and developer mailing lists available through the v9fs project on sourceforge (http://sourceforge.net/projects/v9fs). +A stand-alone version of the module (which should build for any 2.6 kernel) +is available via (http://github.com/ericvh/9p-sac/tree/master) + News and other information is maintained on SWiK (http://swik.net/v9fs). Bug reports may be issued through the kernel.org bugzilla diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/afs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/afs.txt index 12ad6c7f4e5..ffef91c4e0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/afs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/afs.txt @@ -23,15 +23,13 @@ it does support include: (*) Security (currently only AFS kaserver and KerberosIV tickets). - (*) File reading. + (*) File reading and writing. (*) Automounting. -It does not yet support the following AFS features: - - (*) Write support. + (*) Local caching (via fscache). - (*) Local caching. +It does not yet support the following AFS features: (*) pioctl() system call. @@ -56,7 +54,7 @@ They permit the debugging messages to be turned on dynamically by manipulating the masks in the following files: /sys/module/af_rxrpc/parameters/debug - /sys/module/afs/parameters/debug + /sys/module/kafs/parameters/debug ===== @@ -66,9 +64,9 @@ USAGE When inserting the driver modules the root cell must be specified along with a list of volume location server IP addresses: - insmod af_rxrpc.o - insmod rxkad.o - insmod kafs.o rootcell=cambridge.redhat.com:172.16.18.73:172.16.18.91 + modprobe af_rxrpc + modprobe rxkad + modprobe kafs rootcell=cambridge.redhat.com:172.16.18.73:172.16.18.91 The first module is the AF_RXRPC network protocol driver. This provides the RxRPC remote operation protocol and may also be accessed from userspace. See: @@ -81,7 +79,7 @@ is the actual filesystem driver for the AFS filesystem. Once the module has been loaded, more modules can be added by the following procedure: - echo add grand.central.org 18.7.14.88:128.2.191.224 >/proc/fs/afs/cells + echo add grand.central.org 18.9.48.14:128.2.203.61:130.237.48.87 >/proc/fs/afs/cells Where the parameters to the "add" command are the name of a cell and a list of volume location servers within that cell, with the latter separated by colons. @@ -101,7 +99,7 @@ The name of the volume can be suffixes with ".backup" or ".readonly" to specify connection to only volumes of those types. The name of the cell is optional, and if not given during a mount, then the -named volume will be looked up in the cell specified during insmod. +named volume will be looked up in the cell specified during modprobe. Additional cells can be added through /proc (see later section). @@ -163,14 +161,14 @@ THE CELL DATABASE The filesystem maintains an internal database of all the cells it knows and the IP addresses of the volume location servers for those cells. The cell to which -the system belongs is added to the database when insmod is performed by the +the system belongs is added to the database when modprobe is performed by the "rootcell=" argument or, if compiled in, using a "kafs.rootcell=" argument on the kernel command line. Further cells can be added by commands similar to the following: echo add CELLNAME VLADDR[:VLADDR][:VLADDR]... >/proc/fs/afs/cells - echo add grand.central.org 18.7.14.88:128.2.191.224 >/proc/fs/afs/cells + echo add grand.central.org 18.9.48.14:128.2.203.61:130.237.48.87 >/proc/fs/afs/cells No other cell database operations are available at this time. @@ -233,7 +231,7 @@ insmod /tmp/kafs.o rootcell=cambridge.redhat.com:172.16.18.91 mount -t afs \%root.afs. /afs mount -t afs \%cambridge.redhat.com:root.cell. /afs/cambridge.redhat.com/ -echo add grand.central.org 18.7.14.88:128.2.191.224 > /proc/fs/afs/cells +echo add grand.central.org 18.9.48.14:128.2.203.61:130.237.48.87 > /proc/fs/afs/cells mount -t afs "#grand.central.org:root.cell." /afs/grand.central.org/ mount -t afs "#grand.central.org:root.archive." /afs/grand.central.org/archive mount -t afs "#grand.central.org:root.contrib." /afs/grand.central.org/contrib diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 7be02ac5fa3..18b5ec8cea4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -134,15 +134,9 @@ ro Mount filesystem read only. Note that ext4 will mount options "ro,noload" can be used to prevent writes to the filesystem. -journal_checksum Enable checksumming of the journal transactions. - This will allow the recovery code in e2fsck and the - kernel to detect corruption in the kernel. It is a - compatible change and will be ignored by older kernels. - journal_async_commit Commit block can be written to disk without waiting for descriptor blocks. If enabled older kernels cannot - mount the device. This will enable 'journal_checksum' - internally. + mount the device. journal=update Update the ext4 file system's journal to the current format. @@ -263,10 +257,18 @@ resuid=n The user ID which may use the reserved blocks. sb=n Use alternate superblock at this location. -quota -noquota -grpquota -usrquota +quota These options are ignored by the filesystem. They +noquota are used only by quota tools to recognize volumes +grpquota where quota should be turned on. See documentation +usrquota in the quota-tools package for more details + (http://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota). + +jqfmt=<quota type> These options tell filesystem details about quota +usrjquota=<file> so that quota information can be properly updated +grpjquota=<file> during journal replay. They replace the above + quota options. See documentation in the quota-tools + package for more details + (http://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota). bh (*) ext4 associates buffer heads to data pages to nobh (a) cache disk block mapping information diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fd966dc9979 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + uevents and GFS2 + ================== + +During the lifetime of a GFS2 mount, a number of uevents are generated. +This document explains what the events are and what they are used +for (by gfs_controld in gfs2-utils). + +A list of GFS2 uevents +----------------------- + +1. ADD + +The ADD event occurs at mount time. It will always be the first +uevent generated by the newly created filesystem. If the mount +is successful, an ONLINE uevent will follow. If it is not successful +then a REMOVE uevent will follow. + +The ADD uevent has two environment variables: SPECTATOR=[0|1] +and RDONLY=[0|1] that specify the spectator status (a read-only mount +with no journal assigned), and read-only (with journal assigned) status +of the filesystem respectively. + +2. ONLINE + +The ONLINE uevent is generated after a successful mount or remount. It +has the same environment variables as the ADD uevent. The ONLINE +uevent, along with the two environment variables for spectator and +RDONLY are a relatively recent addition (2.6.32-rc+) and will not +be generated by older kernels. + +3. CHANGE + +The CHANGE uevent is used in two places. One is when reporting the +successful mount of the filesystem by the first node (FIRSTMOUNT=Done). +This is used as a signal by gfs_controld that it is then ok for other +nodes in the cluster to mount the filesystem. + +The other CHANGE uevent is used to inform of the completion +of journal recovery for one of the filesystems journals. It has +two environment variables, JID= which specifies the journal id which +has just been recovered, and RECOVERY=[Done|Failed] to indicate the +success (or otherwise) of the operation. These uevents are generated +for every journal recovered, whether it is during the initial mount +process or as the result of gfs_controld requesting a specific journal +recovery via the /sys/fs/gfs2/<fsname>/lock_module/recovery file. + +Because the CHANGE uevent was used (in early versions of gfs_controld) +without checking the environment variables to discover the state, we +cannot add any more functions to it without running the risk of +someone using an older version of the user tools and breaking their +cluster. For this reason the ONLINE uevent was used when adding a new +uevent for a successful mount or remount. + +4. OFFLINE + +The OFFLINE uevent is only generated due to filesystem errors and is used +as part of the "withdraw" mechanism. Currently this doesn't give any +information about what the error is, which is something that needs to +be fixed. + +5. REMOVE + +The REMOVE uevent is generated at the end of an unsuccessful mount +or at the end of a umount of the filesystem. All REMOVE uevents will +have been preceeded by at least an ADD uevent for the same fileystem, +and unlike the other uevents is generated automatically by the kernel's +kobject subsystem. + + +Information common to all GFS2 uevents (uevent environment variables) +---------------------------------------------------------------------- + +1. LOCKTABLE= + +The LOCKTABLE is a string, as supplied on the mount command +line (locktable=) or via fstab. It is used as a filesystem label +as well as providing the information for a lock_dlm mount to be +able to join the cluster. + +2. LOCKPROTO= + +The LOCKPROTO is a string, and its value depends on what is set +on the mount command line, or via fstab. It will be either +lock_nolock or lock_dlm. In the future other lock managers +may be supported. + +3. JOURNALID= + +If a journal is in use by the filesystem (journals are not +assigned for spectator mounts) then this will give the +numeric journal id in all GFS2 uevents. + +4. UUID= + +With recent versions of gfs2-utils, mkfs.gfs2 writes a UUID +into the filesystem superblock. If it exists, this will +be included in every uevent relating to the filesystem. + + + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f50f26ce6cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + +The NFS client +============== + +The NFS version 2 protocol was first documented in RFC1094 (March 1989). +Since then two more major releases of NFS have been published, with NFSv3 +being documented in RFC1813 (June 1995), and NFSv4 in RFC3530 (April +2003). + +The Linux NFS client currently supports all the above published versions, +and work is in progress on adding support for minor version 1 of the NFSv4 +protocol. + +The purpose of this document is to provide information on some of the +upcall interfaces that are used in order to provide the NFS client with +some of the information that it requires in order to fully comply with +the NFS spec. + +The DNS resolver +================ + +NFSv4 allows for one server to refer the NFS client to data that has been +migrated onto another server by means of the special "fs_locations" +attribute. See + http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3530#section-6 +and + http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-nfsv4-referrals-00 + +The fs_locations information can take the form of either an ip address and +a path, or a DNS hostname and a path. The latter requires the NFS client to +do a DNS lookup in order to mount the new volume, and hence the need for an +upcall to allow userland to provide this service. + +Assuming that the user has the 'rpc_pipefs' filesystem mounted in the usual +/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs, the upcall consists of the following steps: + + (1) The process checks the dns_resolve cache to see if it contains a + valid entry. If so, it returns that entry and exits. + + (2) If no valid entry exists, the helper script '/sbin/nfs_cache_getent' + (may be changed using the 'nfs.cache_getent' kernel boot parameter) + is run, with two arguments: + - the cache name, "dns_resolve" + - the hostname to resolve + + (3) After looking up the corresponding ip address, the helper script + writes the result into the rpc_pipefs pseudo-file + '/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs/cache/dns_resolve/channel' + in the following (text) format: + + "<ip address> <hostname> <ttl>\n" + + Where <ip address> is in the usual IPv4 (123.456.78.90) or IPv6 + (ffee:ddcc:bbaa:9988:7766:5544:3322:1100, ffee::1100, ...) format. + <hostname> is identical to the second argument of the helper + script, and <ttl> is the 'time to live' of this cache entry (in + units of seconds). + + Note: If <ip address> is invalid, say the string "0", then a negative + entry is created, which will cause the kernel to treat the hostname + as having no valid DNS translation. + + + + +A basic sample /sbin/nfs_cache_getent +===================================== + +#!/bin/bash +# +ttl=600 +# +cut=/usr/bin/cut +getent=/usr/bin/getent +rpc_pipefs=/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs +# +die() +{ + echo "Usage: $0 cache_name entry_name" + exit 1 +} + +[ $# -lt 2 ] && die +cachename="$1" +cache_path=${rpc_pipefs}/cache/${cachename}/channel + +case "${cachename}" in + dns_resolve) + name="$2" + result="$(${getent} hosts ${name} | ${cut} -f1 -d\ )" + [ -z "${result}" ] && result="0" + ;; + *) + die + ;; +esac +echo "${result} ${name} ${ttl}" >${cache_path} + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index fad18f9456e..ffead13f944 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1167,13 +1167,11 @@ CHAPTER 3: PER-PROCESS PARAMETERS 3.1 /proc/<pid>/oom_adj - Adjust the oom-killer score ------------------------------------------------------ -This file can be used to adjust the score used to select which processes should -be killed in an out-of-memory situation. The oom_adj value is a characteristic -of the task's mm, so all threads that share an mm with pid will have the same -oom_adj value. A high value will increase the likelihood of this process being -killed by the oom-killer. Valid values are in the range -16 to +15 as -explained below and a special value of -17, which disables oom-killing -altogether for threads sharing pid's mm. +This file can be used to adjust the score used to select which processes +should be killed in an out-of-memory situation. Giving it a high score will +increase the likelihood of this process being killed by the oom-killer. Valid +values are in the range -16 to +15, plus the special value -17, which disables +oom-killing altogether for this process. The process to be killed in an out-of-memory situation is selected among all others based on its badness score. This value equals the original memory size of the process @@ -1187,9 +1185,6 @@ the parent's score if they do not share the same memory. Thus forking servers are the prime candidates to be killed. Having only one 'hungry' child will make parent less preferable than the child. -/proc/<pid>/oom_adj cannot be changed for kthreads since they are immune from -oom-killing already. - /proc/<pid>/oom_score shows process' current badness score. The following heuristics are then applied: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt index b843743aa0b..0d15ebccf5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ better to do. The file is seekable, in that one can do something like the following: dd if=/proc/sequence of=out1 count=1 - dd if=/proc/sequence skip=1 out=out2 count=1 + dd if=/proc/sequence skip=1 of=out2 count=1 Then concatenate the output files out1 and out2 and get the right result. Yes, it is a thoroughly useless module, but the point is to show diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 7e81e37c0b1..b245d524d56 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -23,7 +23,8 @@ interface. Using sysfs ~~~~~~~~~~~ -sysfs is always compiled in. You can access it by doing: +sysfs is always compiled in if CONFIG_SYSFS is defined. You can access +it by doing: mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys diff --git a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..84eb26808de --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +Using flexible arrays in the kernel +Last updated for 2.6.31 +Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net> + +Large contiguous memory allocations can be unreliable in the Linux kernel. +Kernel programmers will sometimes respond to this problem by allocating +pages with vmalloc(). This solution not ideal, though. On 32-bit systems, +memory from vmalloc() must be mapped into a relatively small address space; +it's easy to run out. On SMP systems, the page table changes required by +vmalloc() allocations can require expensive cross-processor interrupts on +all CPUs. And, on all systems, use of space in the vmalloc() range +increases pressure on the translation lookaside buffer (TLB), reducing the +performance of the system. + +In many cases, the need for memory from vmalloc() can be eliminated by +piecing together an array from smaller parts; the flexible array library +exists to make this task easier. + +A flexible array holds an arbitrary (within limits) number of fixed-sized +objects, accessed via an integer index. Sparse arrays are handled +reasonably well. Only single-page allocations are made, so memory +allocation failures should be relatively rare. The down sides are that the +arrays cannot be indexed directly, individual object size cannot exceed the +system page size, and putting data into a flexible array requires a copy +operation. It's also worth noting that flexible arrays do no internal +locking at all; if concurrent access to an array is possible, then the +caller must arrange for appropriate mutual exclusion. + +The creation of a flexible array is done with: + + #include <linux/flex_array.h> + + struct flex_array *flex_array_alloc(int element_size, + unsigned int total, + gfp_t flags); + +The individual object size is provided by element_size, while total is the +maximum number of objects which can be stored in the array. The flags +argument is passed directly to the internal memory allocation calls. With +the current code, using flags to ask for high memory is likely to lead to +notably unpleasant side effects. + +Storing data into a flexible array is accomplished with a call to: + + int flex_array_put(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int element_nr, + void *src, gfp_t flags); + +This call will copy the data from src into the array, in the position +indicated by element_nr (which must be less than the maximum specified when +the array was created). If any memory allocations must be performed, flags +will be used. The return value is zero on success, a negative error code +otherwise. + +There might possibly be a need to store data into a flexible array while +running in some sort of atomic context; in this situation, sleeping in the +memory allocator would be a bad thing. That can be avoided by using +GFP_ATOMIC for the flags value, but, often, there is a better way. The +trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before +entering atomic context, using: + + int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start, + unsigned int end, gfp_t flags); + +This function will ensure that memory for the elements indexed in the range +defined by start and end has been allocated. Thereafter, a +flex_array_put() call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to +block. + +Getting data back out of the array is done with: + + void *flex_array_get(struct flex_array *fa, unsigned int element_nr); + +The return value is a pointer to the data element, or NULL if that +particular element has never been allocated. + +Note that it is possible to get back a valid pointer for an element which +has never been stored in the array. Memory for array elements is allocated +one page at a time; a single allocation could provide memory for several +adjacent elements. The flexible array code does not know if a specific +element has been written; it only knows if the associated memory is +present. So a flex_array_get() call on an element which was never stored +in the array has the potential to return a pointer to random data. If the +caller does not have a separate way to know which elements were actually +stored, it might be wise, at least, to add GFP_ZERO to the flags argument +to ensure that all elements are zeroed. + +There is no way to remove a single element from the array. It is possible, +though, to remove all elements with a call to: + + void flex_array_free_parts(struct flex_array *array); + +This call frees all elements, but leaves the array itself in place. +Freeing the entire array is done with: + + void flex_array_free(struct flex_array *array); + +As of this writing, there are no users of flexible arrays in the mainline +kernel. The functions described here are also not exported to modules; +that will probably be fixed when somebody comes up with a need for it. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 index 5628fcf4207..e76a7892f68 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 @@ -2,11 +2,11 @@ Kernel driver pcf8591 ===================== Supported chips: - * Philips PCF8591 + * Philips/NXP PCF8591 Prefix: 'pcf8591' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f - Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductor website - http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8591P.html + Datasheet: Publicly available at the NXP website + http://www.nxp.com/pip/PCF8591_6.html Authors: Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net> @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@ Authors: Description ----------- + The PCF8591 is an 8-bit A/D and D/A converter (4 analog inputs and one -analog output) for the I2C bus produced by Philips Semiconductors. It -is designed to provide a byte I2C interface to up to 4 separate devices. +analog output) for the I2C bus produced by Philips Semiconductors (now NXP). +It is designed to provide a byte I2C interface to up to 4 separate devices. The PCF8591 has 4 analog inputs programmable as single-ended or differential inputs : @@ -58,8 +59,8 @@ Accessing PCF8591 via /sys interface ------------------------------------- ! Be careful ! -The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect ! Stupid chip. -So every chip with address in the interval [48..4f] is +The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect! Stupid chip. +So every chip with address in the interval [0x48..0x4f] is detected as PCF8591. If you have other chips in this address range, the workaround is to load this module after the one for your others chips. @@ -67,19 +68,20 @@ for your others chips. On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being created for each detected PCF8591: -/sys/bus/devices/<0>-<1>/ +/sys/bus/i2c/devices/<0>-<1>/ where <0> is the bus the chip was detected on (e. g. i2c-0) and <1> the chip address ([48..4f]) Inside these directories, there are such files: -in0, in1, in2, in3, out0_enable, out0_output, name +in0_input, in1_input, in2_input, in3_input, out0_enable, out0_output, name Name contains chip name. -The in0, in1, in2 and in3 files are RO. Reading gives the value of the -corresponding channel. Depending on the current analog inputs configuration, -files in2 and/or in3 do not exist. Values range are from 0 to 255 for single -ended inputs and -128 to +127 for differential inputs (8-bit ADC). +The in0_input, in1_input, in2_input and in3_input files are RO. Reading gives +the value of the corresponding channel. Depending on the current analog inputs +configuration, files in2_input and in3_input may not exist. Values range +from 0 to 255 for single ended inputs and -128 to +127 for differential inputs +(8-bit ADC). The out0_enable file is RW. Reading gives "1" for analog output enabled and "0" for analog output disabled. Writing accepts "0" and "1" accordingly. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp421 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp421 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0cf07f82474 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp421 @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +Kernel driver tmp421 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Texas Instruments TMP421 + Prefix: 'tmp421' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2a, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e and 0x4f + Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp421.html + * Texas Instruments TMP422 + Prefix: 'tmp422' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2a, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e and 0x4f + Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp421.html + * Texas Instruments TMP423 + Prefix: 'tmp423' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2a, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e and 0x4f + Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp421.html + +Authors: + Andre Prendel <andre.prendel@gmx.de> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for Texas Instruments TMP421, TMP422 +and TMP423 temperature sensor chips. These chips implement one local +and up to one (TMP421), up to two (TMP422) or up to three (TMP423) +remote sensors. Temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. The chips +are wired over I2C/SMBus and specified over a temperature range of -40 +to +125 degrees Celsius. Resolution for both the local and remote +channels is 0.0625 degree C. + +The chips support only temperature measurement. The driver exports +the temperature values via the following sysfs files: + +temp[1-4]_input +temp[2-4]_fault diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x b/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..24f47d8f6a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/wm831x @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +Kernel driver wm831x-hwmon +========================== + +Supported chips: + * Wolfson Microelectronics WM831x PMICs + Prefix: 'wm831x' + Datasheet: + http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8310 + http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8311 + http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8312 + +Authors: Mark Brown <broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> + +Description +----------- + +The WM831x series of PMICs include an AUXADC which can be used to +monitor a range of system operating parameters, including the voltages +of the major supplies within the system. Currently the driver provides +reporting of all the input values but does not provide any alarms. + +Voltage Monitoring +------------------ + +Voltages are sampled by a 12 bit ADC. Voltages in milivolts are 1.465 +times the ADC value. + +Temperature Monitoring +---------------------- + +Temperatures are sampled by a 12 bit ADC. Chip and battery temperatures +are available. The chip temperature is calculated as: + + Degrees celsius = (512.18 - data) / 1.0983 + +while the battery temperature calculation will depend on the NTC +thermistor component. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/wm8350 b/Documentation/hwmon/wm8350 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..98f923bd2e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/wm8350 @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Kernel driver wm8350-hwmon +========================== + +Supported chips: + * Wolfson Microelectronics WM835x PMICs + Prefix: 'wm8350' + Datasheet: + http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8350 + http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8351 + http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/products/WM8352 + +Authors: Mark Brown <broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> + +Description +----------- + +The WM835x series of PMICs include an AUXADC which can be used to +monitor a range of system operating parameters, including the voltages +of the major supplies within the system. Currently the driver provides +simple access to these major supplies. + +Voltage Monitoring +------------------ + +Voltages are sampled by a 12 bit ADC. For the internal supplies the ADC +is referenced to the system VRTC. diff --git a/Documentation/input/sentelic.txt b/Documentation/input/sentelic.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f7160a2fb6a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/sentelic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,475 @@ +Copyright (C) 2002-2008 Sentelic Corporation. +Last update: Oct-31-2008 + +============================================================================== +* Finger Sensing Pad Intellimouse Mode(scrolling wheel, 4th and 5th buttons) +============================================================================== +A) MSID 4: Scrolling wheel mode plus Forward page(4th button) and Backward + page (5th button) +@1. Set sample rate to 200; +@2. Set sample rate to 200; +@3. Set sample rate to 80; +@4. Issuing the "Get device ID" command (0xF2) and waits for the response; +@5. FSP will respond 0x04. + +Packet 1 + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |Y|X|y|x|1|M|R|L| 2 |X|X|X|X|X|X|X|X| 3 |Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y| 4 | | |B|F|W|W|W|W| + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +Byte 1: Bit7 => Y overflow + Bit6 => X overflow + Bit5 => Y sign bit + Bit4 => X sign bit + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => Middle Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit1 => Right Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit0 => Left Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. +Byte 2: X Movement(9-bit 2's complement integers) +Byte 3: Y Movement(9-bit 2's complement integers) +Byte 4: Bit3~Bit0 => the scrolling wheel's movement since the last data report. + valid values, -8 ~ +7 + Bit4 => 1 = 4th mouse button is pressed, Forward one page. + 0 = 4th mouse button is not pressed. + Bit5 => 1 = 5th mouse button is pressed, Backward one page. + 0 = 5th mouse button is not pressed. + +B) MSID 6: Horizontal and Vertical scrolling. +@ Set bit 1 in register 0x40 to 1 + +# FSP replaces scrolling wheel's movement as 4 bits to show horizontal and + vertical scrolling. + +Packet 1 + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |Y|X|y|x|1|M|R|L| 2 |X|X|X|X|X|X|X|X| 3 |Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y| 4 | | |B|F|l|r|u|d| + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +Byte 1: Bit7 => Y overflow + Bit6 => X overflow + Bit5 => Y sign bit + Bit4 => X sign bit + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => Middle Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit1 => Right Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit0 => Left Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. +Byte 2: X Movement(9-bit 2's complement integers) +Byte 3: Y Movement(9-bit 2's complement integers) +Byte 4: Bit0 => the Vertical scrolling movement downward. + Bit1 => the Vertical scrolling movement upward. + Bit2 => the Vertical scrolling movement rightward. + Bit3 => the Vertical scrolling movement leftward. + Bit4 => 1 = 4th mouse button is pressed, Forward one page. + 0 = 4th mouse button is not pressed. + Bit5 => 1 = 5th mouse button is pressed, Backward one page. + 0 = 5th mouse button is not pressed. + +C) MSID 7: +# FSP uses 2 packets(8 Bytes) data to represent Absolute Position + so we have PACKET NUMBER to identify packets. + If PACKET NUMBER is 0, the packet is Packet 1. + If PACKET NUMBER is 1, the packet is Packet 2. + Please count this number in program. + +# MSID6 special packet will be enable at the same time when enable MSID 7. + +============================================================================== +* Absolute position for STL3886-G0. +============================================================================== +@ Set bit 2 or 3 in register 0x40 to 1 +@ Set bit 6 in register 0x40 to 1 + +Packet 1 (ABSOLUTE POSITION) + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |0|1|V|1|1|M|R|L| 2 |X|X|X|X|X|X|X|X| 3 |Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y| 4 |r|l|d|u|X|X|Y|Y| + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +Byte 1: Bit7~Bit6 => 00, Normal data packet + => 01, Absolute coordination packet + => 10, Notify packet + Bit5 => valid bit + Bit4 => 1 + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => Middle Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit1 => Right Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit0 => Left Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. +Byte 2: X coordinate (xpos[9:2]) +Byte 3: Y coordinate (ypos[9:2]) +Byte 4: Bit1~Bit0 => Y coordinate (xpos[1:0]) + Bit3~Bit2 => X coordinate (ypos[1:0]) + Bit4 => scroll up + Bit5 => scroll down + Bit6 => scroll left + Bit7 => scroll right + +Notify Packet for G0 + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |1|0|0|1|1|M|R|L| 2 |C|C|C|C|C|C|C|C| 3 |M|M|M|M|M|M|M|M| 4 |0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0| + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +Byte 1: Bit7~Bit6 => 00, Normal data packet + => 01, Absolute coordination packet + => 10, Notify packet + Bit5 => 0 + Bit4 => 1 + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => Middle Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit1 => Right Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit0 => Left Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. +Byte 2: Message Type => 0x5A (Enable/Disable status packet) + Mode Type => 0xA5 (Normal/Icon mode status) +Byte 3: Message Type => 0x00 (Disabled) + => 0x01 (Enabled) + Mode Type => 0x00 (Normal) + => 0x01 (Icon) +Byte 4: Bit7~Bit0 => Don't Care + +============================================================================== +* Absolute position for STL3888-A0. +============================================================================== +Packet 1 (ABSOLUTE POSITION) + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |0|1|V|A|1|L|0|1| 2 |X|X|X|X|X|X|X|X| 3 |Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y| 4 |x|x|y|y|X|X|Y|Y| + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +Byte 1: Bit7~Bit6 => 00, Normal data packet + => 01, Absolute coordination packet + => 10, Notify packet + Bit5 => Valid bit, 0 means that the coordinate is invalid or finger up. + When both fingers are up, the last two reports have zero valid + bit. + Bit4 => arc + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => Left Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is released. + Bit1 => 0 + Bit0 => 1 +Byte 2: X coordinate (xpos[9:2]) +Byte 3: Y coordinate (ypos[9:2]) +Byte 4: Bit1~Bit0 => Y coordinate (xpos[1:0]) + Bit3~Bit2 => X coordinate (ypos[1:0]) + Bit5~Bit4 => y1_g + Bit7~Bit6 => x1_g + +Packet 2 (ABSOLUTE POSITION) + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |0|1|V|A|1|R|1|0| 2 |X|X|X|X|X|X|X|X| 3 |Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y|Y| 4 |x|x|y|y|X|X|Y|Y| + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +Byte 1: Bit7~Bit6 => 00, Normal data packet + => 01, Absolute coordinates packet + => 10, Notify packet + Bit5 => Valid bit, 0 means that the coordinate is invalid or finger up. + When both fingers are up, the last two reports have zero valid + bit. + Bit4 => arc + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => Right Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is released. + Bit1 => 1 + Bit0 => 0 +Byte 2: X coordinate (xpos[9:2]) +Byte 3: Y coordinate (ypos[9:2]) +Byte 4: Bit1~Bit0 => Y coordinate (xpos[1:0]) + Bit3~Bit2 => X coordinate (ypos[1:0]) + Bit5~Bit4 => y2_g + Bit7~Bit6 => x2_g + +Notify Packet for STL3888-A0 + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |1|0|1|P|1|M|R|L| 2 |C|C|C|C|C|C|C|C| 3 |0|0|F|F|0|0|0|i| 4 |r|l|d|u|0|0|0|0| + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +Byte 1: Bit7~Bit6 => 00, Normal data packet + => 01, Absolute coordination packet + => 10, Notify packet + Bit5 => 1 + Bit4 => when in absolute coordinates mode (valid when EN_PKT_GO is 1): + 0: left button is generated by the on-pad command + 1: left button is generated by the external button + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => Middle Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit1 => Right Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. + Bit0 => Left Button, 1 is pressed, 0 is not pressed. +Byte 2: Message Type => 0xB7 (Multi Finger, Multi Coordinate mode) +Byte 3: Bit7~Bit6 => Don't care + Bit5~Bit4 => Number of fingers + Bit3~Bit1 => Reserved + Bit0 => 1: enter gesture mode; 0: leaving gesture mode +Byte 4: Bit7 => scroll right button + Bit6 => scroll left button + Bit5 => scroll down button + Bit4 => scroll up button + * Note that if gesture and additional button (Bit4~Bit7) + happen at the same time, the button information will not + be sent. + Bit3~Bit0 => Reserved + +Sample sequence of Multi-finger, Multi-coordinate mode: + + notify packet (valid bit == 1), abs pkt 1, abs pkt 2, abs pkt 1, + abs pkt 2, ..., notify packet(valid bit == 0) + +============================================================================== +* FSP Enable/Disable packet +============================================================================== + Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +BYTE |---------------|BYTE |---------------|BYTE|---------------|BYTE|---------------| + 1 |Y|X|0|0|1|M|R|L| 2 |0|1|0|1|1|0|1|E| 3 | | | | | | | | | 4 | | | | | | | | | + |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| |---------------| + +FSP will send out enable/disable packet when FSP receive PS/2 enable/disable +command. Host will receive the packet which Middle, Right, Left button will +be set. The packet only use byte 0 and byte 1 as a pattern of original packet. +Ignore the other bytes of the packet. + +Byte 1: Bit7 => 0, Y overflow + Bit6 => 0, X overflow + Bit5 => 0, Y sign bit + Bit4 => 0, X sign bit + Bit3 => 1 + Bit2 => 1, Middle Button + Bit1 => 1, Right Button + Bit0 => 1, Left Button +Byte 2: Bit7~1 => (0101101b) + Bit0 => 1 = Enable + 0 = Disable +Byte 3: Don't care +Byte 4: Don't care (MOUSE ID 3, 4) +Byte 5~8: Don't care (Absolute packet) + +============================================================================== +* PS/2 Command Set +============================================================================== + +FSP supports basic PS/2 commanding set and modes, refer to following URL for +details about PS/2 commands: + +http://www.computer-engineering.org/index.php?title=PS/2_Mouse_Interface + +============================================================================== +* Programming Sequence for Determining Packet Parsing Flow +============================================================================== +1. Identify FSP by reading device ID(0x00) and version(0x01) register + +2. Determine number of buttons by reading status2 (0x0b) register + + buttons = reg[0x0b] & 0x30 + + if buttons == 0x30 or buttons == 0x20: + # two/four buttons + Refer to 'Finger Sensing Pad PS/2 Mouse Intellimouse' + section A for packet parsing detail(ignore byte 4, bit ~ 7) + elif buttons == 0x10: + # 6 buttons + Refer to 'Finger Sensing Pad PS/2 Mouse Intellimouse' + section B for packet parsing detail + elif buttons == 0x00: + # 6 buttons + Refer to 'Finger Sensing Pad PS/2 Mouse Intellimouse' + section A for packet parsing detail + +============================================================================== +* Programming Sequence for Register Reading/Writing +============================================================================== + +Register inversion requirement: + + Following values needed to be inverted(the '~' operator in C) before being +sent to FSP: + + 0xe9, 0xee, 0xf2 and 0xff. + +Register swapping requirement: + + Following values needed to have their higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits being +swapped before being sent to FSP: + + 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 and 200. + +Register reading sequence: + + 1. send 0xf3 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 2. send 0x66 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 3. send 0x88 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 4. send 0xf3 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 5. if the register address being to read is not required to be + inverted(refer to the 'Register inversion requirement' section), + goto step 6 + + 5a. send 0x68 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 5b. send the inverted register address to FSP and goto step 8; + + 6. if the register address being to read is not required to be + swapped(refer to the 'Register swapping requirement' section), + goto step 7 + + 6a. send 0xcc PS/2 command to FSP; + + 6b. send the swapped register address to FSP and goto step 8; + + 7. send 0x66 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 7a. send the original register address to FSP and goto step 8; + + 8. send 0xe9(status request) PS/2 command to FSP; + + 9. the response read from FSP should be the requested register value. + +Register writing sequence: + + 1. send 0xf3 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 2. if the register address being to write is not required to be + inverted(refer to the 'Register inversion requirement' section), + goto step 3 + + 2a. send 0x74 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 2b. send the inverted register address to FSP and goto step 5; + + 3. if the register address being to write is not required to be + swapped(refer to the 'Register swapping requirement' section), + goto step 4 + + 3a. send 0x77 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 3b. send the swapped register address to FSP and goto step 5; + + 4. send 0x55 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 4a. send the register address to FSP and goto step 5; + + 5. send 0xf3 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 6. if the register value being to write is not required to be + inverted(refer to the 'Register inversion requirement' section), + goto step 7 + + 6a. send 0x47 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 6b. send the inverted register value to FSP and goto step 9; + + 7. if the register value being to write is not required to be + swapped(refer to the 'Register swapping requirement' section), + goto step 8 + + 7a. send 0x44 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 7b. send the swapped register value to FSP and goto step 9; + + 8. send 0x33 PS/2 command to FSP; + + 8a. send the register value to FSP; + + 9. the register writing sequence is completed. + +============================================================================== +* Register Listing +============================================================================== + +offset width default r/w name +0x00 bit7~bit0 0x01 RO device ID + +0x01 bit7~bit0 0xc0 RW version ID + +0x02 bit7~bit0 0x01 RO vendor ID + +0x03 bit7~bit0 0x01 RO product ID + +0x04 bit3~bit0 0x01 RW revision ID + +0x0b RO test mode status 1 + bit3 1 RO 0: rotate 180 degree, 1: no rotation + + bit5~bit4 RO number of buttons + 11 => 2, lbtn/rbtn + 10 => 4, lbtn/rbtn/scru/scrd + 01 => 6, lbtn/rbtn/scru/scrd/scrl/scrr + 00 => 6, lbtn/rbtn/scru/scrd/fbtn/bbtn + +0x0f RW register file page control + bit0 0 RW 1 to enable page 1 register files + +0x10 RW system control 1 + bit0 1 RW Reserved, must be 1 + bit1 0 RW Reserved, must be 0 + bit4 1 RW Reserved, must be 0 + bit5 0 RW register clock gating enable + 0: read only, 1: read/write enable + (Note that following registers does not require clock gating being + enabled prior to write: 05 06 07 08 09 0c 0f 10 11 12 16 17 18 23 2e + 40 41 42 43.) + +0x31 RW on-pad command detection + bit7 0 RW on-pad command left button down tag + enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + +0x34 RW on-pad command control 5 + bit4~bit0 0x05 RW XLO in 0s/4/1, so 03h = 0010.1b = 2.5 + (Note that position unit is in 0.5 scanline) + + bit7 0 RW on-pad tap zone enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + +0x35 RW on-pad command control 6 + bit4~bit0 0x1d RW XHI in 0s/4/1, so 19h = 1100.1b = 12.5 + (Note that position unit is in 0.5 scanline) + +0x36 RW on-pad command control 7 + bit4~bit0 0x04 RW YLO in 0s/4/1, so 03h = 0010.1b = 2.5 + (Note that position unit is in 0.5 scanline) + +0x37 RW on-pad command control 8 + bit4~bit0 0x13 RW YHI in 0s/4/1, so 11h = 1000.1b = 8.5 + (Note that position unit is in 0.5 scanline) + +0x40 RW system control 5 + bit1 0 RW FSP Intellimouse mode enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + + bit2 0 RW movement + abs. coordinate mode enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + (Note that this function has the functionality of bit 1 even when + bit 1 is not set. However, the format is different from that of bit 1. + In addition, when bit 1 and bit 2 are set at the same time, bit 2 will + override bit 1.) + + bit3 0 RW abs. coordinate only mode enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + (Note that this function has the functionality of bit 1 even when + bit 1 is not set. However, the format is different from that of bit 1. + In addition, when bit 1, bit 2 and bit 3 are set at the same time, + bit 3 will override bit 1 and 2.) + + bit5 0 RW auto switch enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + + bit6 0 RW G0 abs. + notify packet format enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + (Note that the absolute/relative coordinate output still depends on + bit 2 and 3. That is, if any of those bit is 1, host will receive + absolute coordinates; otherwise, host only receives packets with + relative coordinate.) + +0x43 RW on-pad control + bit0 0 RW on-pad control enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + (Note that if this bit is cleared, bit 3/5 will be ineffective) + + bit3 0 RW on-pad fix vertical scrolling enable + 0: disable, 1: enable + + bit5 0 RW on-pad fix horizontal scrolling enable + 0: disable, 1: enable diff --git a/Documentation/intel_txt.txt b/Documentation/intel_txt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f40a1f03001 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/intel_txt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +Intel(R) TXT Overview: +===================== + +Intel's technology for safer computing, Intel(R) Trusted Execution +Technology (Intel(R) TXT), defines platform-level enhancements that +provide the building blocks for creating trusted platforms. + +Intel TXT was formerly known by the code name LaGrande Technology (LT). + +Intel TXT in Brief: +o Provides dynamic root of trust for measurement (DRTM) +o Data protection in case of improper shutdown +o Measurement and verification of launched environment + +Intel TXT is part of the vPro(TM) brand and is also available some +non-vPro systems. It is currently available on desktop systems +based on the Q35, X38, Q45, and Q43 Express chipsets (e.g. Dell +Optiplex 755, HP dc7800, etc.) and mobile systems based on the GM45, +PM45, and GS45 Express chipsets. + +For more information, see http://www.intel.com/technology/security/. +This site also has a link to the Intel TXT MLE Developers Manual, +which has been updated for the new released platforms. + +Intel TXT has been presented at various events over the past few +years, some of which are: + LinuxTAG 2008: + http://www.linuxtag.org/2008/en/conf/events/vp-donnerstag/ + details.html?talkid=110 + TRUST2008: + http://www.trust2008.eu/downloads/Keynote-Speakers/ + 3_David-Grawrock_The-Front-Door-of-Trusted-Computing.pdf + IDF 2008, Shanghai: + http://inteldeveloperforum.com.edgesuite.net/shanghai_2008/ + aep/PROS003/index.html + IDFs 2006, 2007 (I'm not sure if/where they are online) + +Trusted Boot Project Overview: +============================= + +Trusted Boot (tboot) is an open source, pre- kernel/VMM module that +uses Intel TXT to perform a measured and verified launch of an OS +kernel/VMM. + +It is hosted on SourceForge at http://sourceforge.net/projects/tboot. +The mercurial source repo is available at http://www.bughost.org/ +repos.hg/tboot.hg. + +Tboot currently supports launching Xen (open source VMM/hypervisor +w/ TXT support since v3.2), and now Linux kernels. + + +Value Proposition for Linux or "Why should you care?" +===================================================== + +While there are many products and technologies that attempt to +measure or protect the integrity of a running kernel, they all +assume the kernel is "good" to begin with. The Integrity +Measurement Architecture (IMA) and Linux Integrity Module interface +are examples of such solutions. + +To get trust in the initial kernel without using Intel TXT, a +static root of trust must be used. This bases trust in BIOS +starting at system reset and requires measurement of all code +executed between system reset through the completion of the kernel +boot as well as data objects used by that code. In the case of a +Linux kernel, this means all of BIOS, any option ROMs, the +bootloader and the boot config. In practice, this is a lot of +code/data, much of which is subject to change from boot to boot +(e.g. changing NICs may change option ROMs). Without reference +hashes, these measurement changes are difficult to assess or +confirm as benign. This process also does not provide DMA +protection, memory configuration/alias checks and locks, crash +protection, or policy support. + +By using the hardware-based root of trust that Intel TXT provides, +many of these issues can be mitigated. Specifically: many +pre-launch components can be removed from the trust chain, DMA +protection is provided to all launched components, a large number +of platform configuration checks are performed and values locked, +protection is provided for any data in the event of an improper +shutdown, and there is support for policy-based execution/verification. +This provides a more stable measurement and a higher assurance of +system configuration and initial state than would be otherwise +possible. Since the tboot project is open source, source code for +almost all parts of the trust chain is available (excepting SMM and +Intel-provided firmware). + +How Does it Work? +================= + +o Tboot is an executable that is launched by the bootloader as + the "kernel" (the binary the bootloader executes). +o It performs all of the work necessary to determine if the + platform supports Intel TXT and, if so, executes the GETSEC[SENTER] + processor instruction that initiates the dynamic root of trust. + - If tboot determines that the system does not support Intel TXT + or is not configured correctly (e.g. the SINIT AC Module was + incorrect), it will directly launch the kernel with no changes + to any state. + - Tboot will output various information about its progress to the + terminal, serial port, and/or an in-memory log; the output + locations can be configured with a command line switch. +o The GETSEC[SENTER] instruction will return control to tboot and + tboot then verifies certain aspects of the environment (e.g. TPM NV + lock, e820 table does not have invalid entries, etc.). +o It will wake the APs from the special sleep state the GETSEC[SENTER] + instruction had put them in and place them into a wait-for-SIPI + state. + - Because the processors will not respond to an INIT or SIPI when + in the TXT environment, it is necessary to create a small VT-x + guest for the APs. When they run in this guest, they will + simply wait for the INIT-SIPI-SIPI sequence, which will cause + VMEXITs, and then disable VT and jump to the SIPI vector. This + approach seemed like a better choice than having to insert + special code into the kernel's MP wakeup sequence. +o Tboot then applies an (optional) user-defined launch policy to + verify the kernel and initrd. + - This policy is rooted in TPM NV and is described in the tboot + project. The tboot project also contains code for tools to + create and provision the policy. + - Policies are completely under user control and if not present + then any kernel will be launched. + - Policy action is flexible and can include halting on failures + or simply logging them and continuing. +o Tboot adjusts the e820 table provided by the bootloader to reserve + its own location in memory as well as to reserve certain other + TXT-related regions. +o As part of it's launch, tboot DMA protects all of RAM (using the + VT-d PMRs). Thus, the kernel must be booted with 'intel_iommu=on' + in order to remove this blanket protection and use VT-d's + page-level protection. +o Tboot will populate a shared page with some data about itself and + pass this to the Linux kernel as it transfers control. + - The location of the shared page is passed via the boot_params + struct as a physical address. +o The kernel will look for the tboot shared page address and, if it + exists, map it. +o As one of the checks/protections provided by TXT, it makes a copy + of the VT-d DMARs in a DMA-protected region of memory and verifies + them for correctness. The VT-d code will detect if the kernel was + launched with tboot and use this copy instead of the one in the + ACPI table. +o At this point, tboot and TXT are out of the picture until a + shutdown (S<n>) +o In order to put a system into any of the sleep states after a TXT + launch, TXT must first be exited. This is to prevent attacks that + attempt to crash the system to gain control on reboot and steal + data left in memory. + - The kernel will perform all of its sleep preparation and + populate the shared page with the ACPI data needed to put the + platform in the desired sleep state. + - Then the kernel jumps into tboot via the vector specified in the + shared page. + - Tboot will clean up the environment and disable TXT, then use the + kernel-provided ACPI information to actually place the platform + into the desired sleep state. + - In the case of S3, tboot will also register itself as the resume + vector. This is necessary because it must re-establish the + measured environment upon resume. Once the TXT environment + has been restored, it will restore the TPM PCRs and then + transfer control back to the kernel's S3 resume vector. + In order to preserve system integrity across S3, the kernel + provides tboot with a set of memory ranges (kernel + code/data/bss, S3 resume code, and AP trampoline) that tboot + will calculate a MAC (message authentication code) over and then + seal with the TPM. On resume and once the measured environment + has been re-established, tboot will re-calculate the MAC and + verify it against the sealed value. Tboot's policy determines + what happens if the verification fails. + +That's pretty much it for TXT support. + + +Configuring the System: +====================== + +This code works with 32bit, 32bit PAE, and 64bit (x86_64) kernels. + +In BIOS, the user must enable: TPM, TXT, VT-x, VT-d. Not all BIOSes +allow these to be individually enabled/disabled and the screens in +which to find them are BIOS-specific. + +grub.conf needs to be modified as follows: + title Linux 2.6.29-tip w/ tboot + root (hd0,0) + kernel /tboot.gz logging=serial,vga,memory + module /vmlinuz-2.6.29-tip intel_iommu=on ro + root=LABEL=/ rhgb console=ttyS0,115200 3 + module /initrd-2.6.29-tip.img + module /Q35_SINIT_17.BIN + +The kernel option for enabling Intel TXT support is found under the +Security top-level menu and is called "Enable Intel(R) Trusted +Execution Technology (TXT)". It is marked as EXPERIMENTAL and +depends on the generic x86 support (to allow maximum flexibility in +kernel build options), since the tboot code will detect whether the +platform actually supports Intel TXT and thus whether any of the +kernel code is executed. + +The Q35_SINIT_17.BIN file is what Intel TXT refers to as an +Authenticated Code Module. It is specific to the chipset in the +system and can also be found on the Trusted Boot site. It is an +(unencrypted) module signed by Intel that is used as part of the +DRTM process to verify and configure the system. It is signed +because it operates at a higher privilege level in the system than +any other macrocode and its correct operation is critical to the +establishment of the DRTM. The process for determining the correct +SINIT ACM for a system is documented in the SINIT-guide.txt file +that is on the tboot SourceForge site under the SINIT ACM downloads. diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 7bb0d934b6d..aafca0a8f66 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -121,6 +121,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'c' 00-7F linux/comstats.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/coda.h conflict! 'c' 80-9F arch/s390/include/asm/chsc.h +'c' A0-AF arch/x86/include/asm/msr.h 'd' 00-FF linux/char/drm/drm/h conflict! 'd' F0-FF linux/digi1.h 'e' all linux/digi1.h conflict! @@ -139,6 +140,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'm' all linux/synclink.h conflict! 'm' 00-1F net/irda/irmod.h conflict! 'n' 00-7F linux/ncp_fs.h +'n' 80-8F linux/nilfs2_fs.h NILFS2 'n' E0-FF video/matrox.h matroxfb 'o' 00-1F fs/ocfs2/ocfs2_fs.h OCFS2 'o' 00-03 include/mtd/ubi-user.h conflict! (OCFS2 and UBI overlaps) @@ -191,7 +193,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 0xAD 00 Netfilter device in development: <mailto:rusty@rustcorp.com.au> 0xAE all linux/kvm.h Kernel-based Virtual Machine - <mailto:kvm-devel@lists.sourceforge.net> + <mailto:kvm@vger.kernel.org> 0xB0 all RATIO devices in development: <mailto:vgo@ratio.de> 0xB1 00-1F PPPoX <mailto:mostrows@styx.uwaterloo.ca> diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt index 4d04572b654..348b9e5e28f 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt @@ -66,7 +66,9 @@ Example kernel-doc function comment: * The longer description can have multiple paragraphs. */ -The first line, with the short description, must be on a single line. +The short description following the subject can span multiple lines +and ends with an @argument description, an empty line or the end of +the comment block. The @argument descriptions must begin on the very next line following this opening short function description line, with no intervening diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index dd1a6d4bb74..0f17d16dc10 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -57,6 +57,7 @@ parameter is applicable: ISAPNP ISA PnP code is enabled. ISDN Appropriate ISDN support is enabled. JOY Appropriate joystick support is enabled. + KVM Kernel Virtual Machine support is enabled. LIBATA Libata driver is enabled LP Printer support is enabled. LOOP Loopback device support is enabled. @@ -1098,6 +1099,44 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file kstack=N [X86] Print N words from the kernel stack in oops dumps. + kvm.ignore_msrs=[KVM] Ignore guest accesses to unhandled MSRs. + Default is 0 (don't ignore, but inject #GP) + + kvm.oos_shadow= [KVM] Disable out-of-sync shadow paging. + Default is 1 (enabled) + + kvm-amd.nested= [KVM,AMD] Allow nested virtualization in KVM/SVM. + Default is 0 (off) + + kvm-amd.npt= [KVM,AMD] Disable nested paging (virtualized MMU) + for all guests. + Default is 1 (enabled) if in 64bit or 32bit-PAE mode + + kvm-intel.bypass_guest_pf= + [KVM,Intel] Disables bypassing of guest page faults + on Intel chips. Default is 1 (enabled) + + kvm-intel.ept= [KVM,Intel] Disable extended page tables + (virtualized MMU) support on capable Intel chips. + Default is 1 (enabled) + + kvm-intel.emulate_invalid_guest_state= + [KVM,Intel] Enable emulation of invalid guest states + Default is 0 (disabled) + + kvm-intel.flexpriority= + [KVM,Intel] Disable FlexPriority feature (TPR shadow). + Default is 1 (enabled) + + kvm-intel.unrestricted_guest= + [KVM,Intel] Disable unrestricted guest feature + (virtualized real and unpaged mode) on capable + Intel chips. Default is 1 (enabled) + + kvm-intel.vpid= [KVM,Intel] Disable Virtual Processor Identification + feature (tagged TLBs) on capable Intel chips. + Default is 1 (enabled) + l2cr= [PPC] l3cr= [PPC] @@ -1115,6 +1154,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file libata.dma=4 Compact Flash DMA only Combinations also work, so libata.dma=3 enables DMA for disks and CDROMs, but not CFs. + + libata.ignore_hpa= [LIBATA] Ignore HPA limit + libata.ignore_hpa=0 keep BIOS limits (default) + libata.ignore_hpa=1 ignore limits, using full disk libata.noacpi [LIBATA] Disables use of ACPI in libata suspend/resume when set. @@ -1243,6 +1286,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file (machvec) in a generic kernel. Example: machvec=hpzx1_swiotlb + machtype= [Loongson] Share the same kernel image file between different + yeeloong laptop. + Example: machtype=lemote-yeeloong-2f-7inch + max_addr=nn[KMG] [KNL,BOOT,ia64] All physical memory greater than or equal to this physical address is ignored. @@ -1499,6 +1546,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file [NFS] set the TCP port on which the NFSv4 callback channel should listen. + nfs.cache_getent= + [NFS] sets the pathname to the program which is used + to update the NFS client cache entries. + + nfs.cache_getent_timeout= + [NFS] sets the timeout after which an attempt to + update a cache entry is deemed to have failed. + nfs.idmap_cache_timeout= [NFS] set the maximum lifetime for idmapper cache entries. @@ -1510,7 +1565,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file of returning the full 64-bit number. The default is to return 64-bit inode numbers. - nmi_debug= [KNL,AVR32] Specify one or more actions to take + nmi_debug= [KNL,AVR32,SH] Specify one or more actions to take when a NMI is triggered. Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die] @@ -1531,6 +1586,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file symbolic names: lapic and ioapic Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic + netpoll.carrier_timeout= + [NET] Specifies amount of time (in seconds) that + netpoll should wait for a carrier. By default netpoll + waits 4 seconds. + no387 [BUGS=X86-32] Tells the kernel to use the 387 maths emulation library even if a 387 maths coprocessor is present. @@ -1915,11 +1975,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: { 0 | 1 } See arch/parisc/kernel/pdc_chassis.c - percpu_alloc= [X86] Select which percpu first chunk allocator to use. - Allowed values are one of "lpage", "embed" and "4k". - See comments in arch/x86/kernel/setup_percpu.c for - details on each allocator. This parameter is primarily - for debugging and performance comparison. + percpu_alloc= Select which percpu first chunk allocator to use. + Currently supported values are "embed" and "page". + Archs may support subset or none of the selections. + See comments in mm/percpu.c for details on each + allocator. This parameter is primarily for debugging + and performance comparison. pf. [PARIDE] See Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt. @@ -2391,6 +2452,18 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file stifb= [HW] Format: bpp:<bpp1>[:<bpp2>[:<bpp3>...]] + sunrpc.min_resvport= + sunrpc.max_resvport= + [NFS,SUNRPC] + SunRPC servers often require that client requests + originate from a privileged port (i.e. a port in the + range 0 < portnr < 1024). + An administrator who wishes to reserve some of these + ports for other uses may adjust the range that the + kernel's sunrpc client considers to be privileged + using these two parameters to set the minimum and + maximum port values. + sunrpc.pool_mode= [NFS] Control how the NFS server code allocates CPUs to @@ -2407,6 +2480,15 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file pernode one pool for each NUMA node (equivalent to global on non-NUMA machines) + sunrpc.tcp_slot_table_entries= + sunrpc.udp_slot_table_entries= + [NFS,SUNRPC] + Sets the upper limit on the number of simultaneous + RPC calls that can be sent from the client to a + server. Increasing these values may allow you to + improve throughput, but will also increase the + amount of memory reserved for use by the client. + swiotlb= [IA-64] Number of I/O TLB slabs switches= [HW,M68k] @@ -2476,6 +2558,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file trace_buf_size=nn[KMG] [FTRACE] will set tracing buffer size. + trace_event=[event-list] + [FTRACE] Set and start specified trace events in order + to facilitate early boot debugging. + See also Documentation/trace/events.txt + trix= [HW,OSS] MediaTrix AudioTrix Pro Format: <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>,<sb_io>,<sb_irq>,<sb_dma>,<mpu_io>,<mpu_irq> diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt index b56aacc1fff..e4dbbdb1bd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys.txt @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ This document has the following sections: - Notes on accessing payload contents - Defining a key type - Request-key callback service - - Key access filesystem + - Garbage collection ============ @@ -113,6 +113,9 @@ Each key has a number of attributes: (*) Dead. The key's type was unregistered, and so the key is now useless. +Keys in the last three states are subject to garbage collection. See the +section on "Garbage collection". + ==================== KEY SERVICE OVERVIEW @@ -754,6 +757,26 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: successful. + (*) Install the calling process's session keyring on its parent. + + long keyctl(KEYCTL_SESSION_TO_PARENT); + + This functions attempts to install the calling process's session keyring + on to the calling process's parent, replacing the parent's current session + keyring. + + The calling process must have the same ownership as its parent, the + keyring must have the same ownership as the calling process, the calling + process must have LINK permission on the keyring and the active LSM module + mustn't deny permission, otherwise error EPERM will be returned. + + Error ENOMEM will be returned if there was insufficient memory to complete + the operation, otherwise 0 will be returned to indicate success. + + The keyring will be replaced next time the parent process leaves the + kernel and resumes executing userspace. + + =============== KERNEL SERVICES =============== @@ -1231,3 +1254,17 @@ by executing: In this case, the program isn't required to actually attach the key to a ring; the rings are provided for reference. + + +================== +GARBAGE COLLECTION +================== + +Dead keys (for which the type has been removed) will be automatically unlinked +from those keyrings that point to them and deleted as soon as possible by a +background garbage collector. + +Similarly, revoked and expired keys will be garbage collected, but only after a +certain amount of time has passed. This time is set as a number of seconds in: + + /proc/sys/kernel/keys/gc_delay diff --git a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt index 89068030b01..34f6638aa5a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt +++ b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt @@ -27,6 +27,13 @@ To trigger an intermediate memory scan: # echo scan > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak +To clear the list of all current possible memory leaks: + + # echo clear > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak + +New leaks will then come up upon reading /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak +again. + Note that the orphan objects are listed in the order they were allocated and one object at the beginning of the list may cause other subsequent objects to be reported as orphan. @@ -42,6 +49,9 @@ Memory scanning parameters can be modified at run-time by writing to the scan=<secs> - set the automatic memory scanning period in seconds (default 600, 0 to stop the automatic scanning) scan - trigger a memory scan + clear - clear list of current memory leak suspects, done by + marking all current reported unreferenced objects grey + dump=<addr> - dump information about the object found at <addr> Kmemleak can also be disabled at boot-time by passing "kmemleak=off" on the kernel command line. @@ -86,6 +96,27 @@ avoid this, kmemleak can also store the number of values pointing to an address inside the block address range that need to be found so that the block is not considered a leak. One example is __vmalloc(). +Testing specific sections with kmemleak +--------------------------------------- + +Upon initial bootup your /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak output page may be +quite extensive. This can also be the case if you have very buggy code +when doing development. To work around these situations you can use the +'clear' command to clear all reported unreferenced objects from the +/sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak output. By issuing a 'scan' after a 'clear' +you can find new unreferenced objects; this should help with testing +specific sections of code. + +To test a critical section on demand with a clean kmemleak do: + + # echo clear > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak + ... test your kernel or modules ... + # echo scan > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak + +Then as usual to get your report with: + + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak + Kmemleak API ------------ diff --git a/Documentation/kref.txt b/Documentation/kref.txt index 130b6e87aa7..ae203f91ee9 100644 --- a/Documentation/kref.txt +++ b/Documentation/kref.txt @@ -84,7 +84,6 @@ int my_data_handler(void) task = kthread_run(more_data_handling, data, "more_data_handling"); if (task == ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM)) { rv = -ENOMEM; - kref_put(&data->refcount, data_release); goto out; } diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5a4bc8cf6d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt @@ -0,0 +1,759 @@ +The Definitive KVM (Kernel-based Virtual Machine) API Documentation +=================================================================== + +1. General description + +The kvm API is a set of ioctls that are issued to control various aspects +of a virtual machine. The ioctls belong to three classes + + - System ioctls: These query and set global attributes which affect the + whole kvm subsystem. In addition a system ioctl is used to create + virtual machines + + - VM ioctls: These query and set attributes that affect an entire virtual + machine, for example memory layout. In addition a VM ioctl is used to + create virtual cpus (vcpus). + + Only run VM ioctls from the same process (address space) that was used + to create the VM. + + - vcpu ioctls: These query and set attributes that control the operation + of a single virtual cpu. + + Only run vcpu ioctls from the same thread that was used to create the + vcpu. + +2. File descritpors + +The kvm API is centered around file descriptors. An initial +open("/dev/kvm") obtains a handle to the kvm subsystem; this handle +can be used to issue system ioctls. A KVM_CREATE_VM ioctl on this +handle will create a VM file descripror which can be used to issue VM +ioctls. A KVM_CREATE_VCPU ioctl on a VM fd will create a virtual cpu +and return a file descriptor pointing to it. Finally, ioctls on a vcpu +fd can be used to control the vcpu, including the important task of +actually running guest code. + +In general file descriptors can be migrated among processes by means +of fork() and the SCM_RIGHTS facility of unix domain socket. These +kinds of tricks are explicitly not supported by kvm. While they will +not cause harm to the host, their actual behavior is not guaranteed by +the API. The only supported use is one virtual machine per process, +and one vcpu per thread. + +3. Extensions + +As of Linux 2.6.22, the KVM ABI has been stabilized: no backward +incompatible change are allowed. However, there is an extension +facility that allows backward-compatible extensions to the API to be +queried and used. + +The extension mechanism is not based on on the Linux version number. +Instead, kvm defines extension identifiers and a facility to query +whether a particular extension identifier is available. If it is, a +set of ioctls is available for application use. + +4. API description + +This section describes ioctls that can be used to control kvm guests. +For each ioctl, the following information is provided along with a +description: + + Capability: which KVM extension provides this ioctl. Can be 'basic', + which means that is will be provided by any kernel that supports + API version 12 (see section 4.1), or a KVM_CAP_xyz constant, which + means availability needs to be checked with KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION + (see section 4.4). + + Architectures: which instruction set architectures provide this ioctl. + x86 includes both i386 and x86_64. + + Type: system, vm, or vcpu. + + Parameters: what parameters are accepted by the ioctl. + + Returns: the return value. General error numbers (EBADF, ENOMEM, EINVAL) + are not detailed, but errors with specific meanings are. + +4.1 KVM_GET_API_VERSION + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: system ioctl +Parameters: none +Returns: the constant KVM_API_VERSION (=12) + +This identifies the API version as the stable kvm API. It is not +expected that this number will change. However, Linux 2.6.20 and +2.6.21 report earlier versions; these are not documented and not +supported. Applications should refuse to run if KVM_GET_API_VERSION +returns a value other than 12. If this check passes, all ioctls +described as 'basic' will be available. + +4.2 KVM_CREATE_VM + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: system ioctl +Parameters: none +Returns: a VM fd that can be used to control the new virtual machine. + +The new VM has no virtual cpus and no memory. An mmap() of a VM fd +will access the virtual machine's physical address space; offset zero +corresponds to guest physical address zero. Use of mmap() on a VM fd +is discouraged if userspace memory allocation (KVM_CAP_USER_MEMORY) is +available. + +4.3 KVM_GET_MSR_INDEX_LIST + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: system +Parameters: struct kvm_msr_list (in/out) +Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error +Errors: + E2BIG: the msr index list is to be to fit in the array specified by + the user. + +struct kvm_msr_list { + __u32 nmsrs; /* number of msrs in entries */ + __u32 indices[0]; +}; + +This ioctl returns the guest msrs that are supported. The list varies +by kvm version and host processor, but does not change otherwise. The +user fills in the size of the indices array in nmsrs, and in return +kvm adjusts nmsrs to reflect the actual number of msrs and fills in +the indices array with their numbers. + +4.4 KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: system ioctl +Parameters: extension identifier (KVM_CAP_*) +Returns: 0 if unsupported; 1 (or some other positive integer) if supported + +The API allows the application to query about extensions to the core +kvm API. Userspace passes an extension identifier (an integer) and +receives an integer that describes the extension availability. +Generally 0 means no and 1 means yes, but some extensions may report +additional information in the integer return value. + +4.5 KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: system ioctl +Parameters: none +Returns: size of vcpu mmap area, in bytes + +The KVM_RUN ioctl (cf.) communicates with userspace via a shared +memory region. This ioctl returns the size of that region. See the +KVM_RUN documentation for details. + +4.6 KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_memory_region (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +struct kvm_memory_region { + __u32 slot; + __u32 flags; + __u64 guest_phys_addr; + __u64 memory_size; /* bytes */ +}; + +/* for kvm_memory_region::flags */ +#define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES 1UL + +This ioctl allows the user to create or modify a guest physical memory +slot. When changing an existing slot, it may be moved in the guest +physical memory space, or its flags may be modified. It may not be +resized. Slots may not overlap. + +The flags field supports just one flag, KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES, which +instructs kvm to keep track of writes to memory within the slot. See +the KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG ioctl. + +It is recommended to use the KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION ioctl instead +of this API, if available. This newer API allows placing guest memory +at specified locations in the host address space, yielding better +control and easy access. + +4.6 KVM_CREATE_VCPU + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: vcpu id (apic id on x86) +Returns: vcpu fd on success, -1 on error + +This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer +in the range [0, max_vcpus). + +4.7 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_dirty_log (in/out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +/* for KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG */ +struct kvm_dirty_log { + __u32 slot; + __u32 padding; + union { + void __user *dirty_bitmap; /* one bit per page */ + __u64 padding; + }; +}; + +Given a memory slot, return a bitmap containing any pages dirtied +since the last call to this ioctl. Bit 0 is the first page in the +memory slot. Ensure the entire structure is cleared to avoid padding +issues. + +4.8 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_memory_alias (in) +Returns: 0 (success), -1 (error) + +struct kvm_memory_alias { + __u32 slot; /* this has a different namespace than memory slots */ + __u32 flags; + __u64 guest_phys_addr; + __u64 memory_size; + __u64 target_phys_addr; +}; + +Defines a guest physical address space region as an alias to another +region. Useful for aliased address, for example the VGA low memory +window. Should not be used with userspace memory. + +4.9 KVM_RUN + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: none +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error +Errors: + EINTR: an unmasked signal is pending + +This ioctl is used to run a guest virtual cpu. While there are no +explicit parameters, there is an implicit parameter block that can be +obtained by mmap()ing the vcpu fd at offset 0, with the size given by +KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE. The parameter block is formatted as a 'struct +kvm_run' (see below). + +4.10 KVM_GET_REGS + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_regs (out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Reads the general purpose registers from the vcpu. + +/* x86 */ +struct kvm_regs { + /* out (KVM_GET_REGS) / in (KVM_SET_REGS) */ + __u64 rax, rbx, rcx, rdx; + __u64 rsi, rdi, rsp, rbp; + __u64 r8, r9, r10, r11; + __u64 r12, r13, r14, r15; + __u64 rip, rflags; +}; + +4.11 KVM_SET_REGS + +Capability: basic +Architectures: all +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_regs (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Writes the general purpose registers into the vcpu. + +See KVM_GET_REGS for the data structure. + +4.12 KVM_GET_SREGS + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_sregs (out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Reads special registers from the vcpu. + +/* x86 */ +struct kvm_sregs { + struct kvm_segment cs, ds, es, fs, gs, ss; + struct kvm_segment tr, ldt; + struct kvm_dtable gdt, idt; + __u64 cr0, cr2, cr3, cr4, cr8; + __u64 efer; + __u64 apic_base; + __u64 interrupt_bitmap[(KVM_NR_INTERRUPTS + 63) / 64]; +}; + +interrupt_bitmap is a bitmap of pending external interrupts. At most +one bit may be set. This interrupt has been acknowledged by the APIC +but not yet injected into the cpu core. + +4.13 KVM_SET_SREGS + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_sregs (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Writes special registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_SREGS for the +data structures. + +4.14 KVM_TRANSLATE + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_translation (in/out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Translates a virtual address according to the vcpu's current address +translation mode. + +struct kvm_translation { + /* in */ + __u64 linear_address; + + /* out */ + __u64 physical_address; + __u8 valid; + __u8 writeable; + __u8 usermode; + __u8 pad[5]; +}; + +4.15 KVM_INTERRUPT + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_interrupt (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Queues a hardware interrupt vector to be injected. This is only +useful if in-kernel local APIC is not used. + +/* for KVM_INTERRUPT */ +struct kvm_interrupt { + /* in */ + __u32 irq; +}; + +Note 'irq' is an interrupt vector, not an interrupt pin or line. + +4.16 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST + +Capability: basic +Architectures: none +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: none) +Returns: -1 on error + +Support for this has been removed. Use KVM_SET_GUEST_DEBUG instead. + +4.17 KVM_GET_MSRS + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_msrs (in/out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Reads model-specific registers from the vcpu. Supported msr indices can +be obtained using KVM_GET_MSR_INDEX_LIST. + +struct kvm_msrs { + __u32 nmsrs; /* number of msrs in entries */ + __u32 pad; + + struct kvm_msr_entry entries[0]; +}; + +struct kvm_msr_entry { + __u32 index; + __u32 reserved; + __u64 data; +}; + +Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the +size of the entries array) and the 'index' member of each array entry. +kvm will fill in the 'data' member. + +4.18 KVM_SET_MSRS + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_msrs (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Writes model-specific registers to the vcpu. See KVM_GET_MSRS for the +data structures. + +Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the +size of the entries array), and the 'index' and 'data' members of each +array entry. + +4.19 KVM_SET_CPUID + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_cpuid (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Defines the vcpu responses to the cpuid instruction. Applications +should use the KVM_SET_CPUID2 ioctl if available. + + +struct kvm_cpuid_entry { + __u32 function; + __u32 eax; + __u32 ebx; + __u32 ecx; + __u32 edx; + __u32 padding; +}; + +/* for KVM_SET_CPUID */ +struct kvm_cpuid { + __u32 nent; + __u32 padding; + struct kvm_cpuid_entry entries[0]; +}; + +4.20 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_signal_mask (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Defines which signals are blocked during execution of KVM_RUN. This +signal mask temporarily overrides the threads signal mask. Any +unblocked signal received (except SIGKILL and SIGSTOP, which retain +their traditional behaviour) will cause KVM_RUN to return with -EINTR. + +Note the signal will only be delivered if not blocked by the original +signal mask. + +/* for KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK */ +struct kvm_signal_mask { + __u32 len; + __u8 sigset[0]; +}; + +4.21 KVM_GET_FPU + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_fpu (out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Reads the floating point state from the vcpu. + +/* for KVM_GET_FPU and KVM_SET_FPU */ +struct kvm_fpu { + __u8 fpr[8][16]; + __u16 fcw; + __u16 fsw; + __u8 ftwx; /* in fxsave format */ + __u8 pad1; + __u16 last_opcode; + __u64 last_ip; + __u64 last_dp; + __u8 xmm[16][16]; + __u32 mxcsr; + __u32 pad2; +}; + +4.22 KVM_SET_FPU + +Capability: basic +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_fpu (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Writes the floating point state to the vcpu. + +/* for KVM_GET_FPU and KVM_SET_FPU */ +struct kvm_fpu { + __u8 fpr[8][16]; + __u16 fcw; + __u16 fsw; + __u8 ftwx; /* in fxsave format */ + __u8 pad1; + __u16 last_opcode; + __u64 last_ip; + __u64 last_dp; + __u8 xmm[16][16]; + __u32 mxcsr; + __u32 pad2; +}; + +4.23 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP + +Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP +Architectures: x86, ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: none +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Creates an interrupt controller model in the kernel. On x86, creates a virtual +ioapic, a virtual PIC (two PICs, nested), and sets up future vcpus to have a +local APIC. IRQ routing for GSIs 0-15 is set to both PIC and IOAPIC; GSI 16-23 +only go to the IOAPIC. On ia64, a IOSAPIC is created. + +4.24 KVM_IRQ_LINE + +Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP +Architectures: x86, ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_irq_level +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Sets the level of a GSI input to the interrupt controller model in the kernel. +Requires that an interrupt controller model has been previously created with +KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Note that edge-triggered interrupts require the level +to be set to 1 and then back to 0. + +struct kvm_irq_level { + union { + __u32 irq; /* GSI */ + __s32 status; /* not used for KVM_IRQ_LEVEL */ + }; + __u32 level; /* 0 or 1 */ +}; + +4.25 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP + +Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP +Architectures: x86, ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_irqchip (in/out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Reads the state of a kernel interrupt controller created with +KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP into a buffer provided by the caller. + +struct kvm_irqchip { + __u32 chip_id; /* 0 = PIC1, 1 = PIC2, 2 = IOAPIC */ + __u32 pad; + union { + char dummy[512]; /* reserving space */ + struct kvm_pic_state pic; + struct kvm_ioapic_state ioapic; + } chip; +}; + +4.26 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP + +Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP +Architectures: x86, ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_irqchip (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Sets the state of a kernel interrupt controller created with +KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP from a buffer provided by the caller. + +struct kvm_irqchip { + __u32 chip_id; /* 0 = PIC1, 1 = PIC2, 2 = IOAPIC */ + __u32 pad; + union { + char dummy[512]; /* reserving space */ + struct kvm_pic_state pic; + struct kvm_ioapic_state ioapic; + } chip; +}; + +5. The kvm_run structure + +Application code obtains a pointer to the kvm_run structure by +mmap()ing a vcpu fd. From that point, application code can control +execution by changing fields in kvm_run prior to calling the KVM_RUN +ioctl, and obtain information about the reason KVM_RUN returned by +looking up structure members. + +struct kvm_run { + /* in */ + __u8 request_interrupt_window; + +Request that KVM_RUN return when it becomes possible to inject external +interrupts into the guest. Useful in conjunction with KVM_INTERRUPT. + + __u8 padding1[7]; + + /* out */ + __u32 exit_reason; + +When KVM_RUN has returned successfully (return value 0), this informs +application code why KVM_RUN has returned. Allowable values for this +field are detailed below. + + __u8 ready_for_interrupt_injection; + +If request_interrupt_window has been specified, this field indicates +an interrupt can be injected now with KVM_INTERRUPT. + + __u8 if_flag; + +The value of the current interrupt flag. Only valid if in-kernel +local APIC is not used. + + __u8 padding2[2]; + + /* in (pre_kvm_run), out (post_kvm_run) */ + __u64 cr8; + +The value of the cr8 register. Only valid if in-kernel local APIC is +not used. Both input and output. + + __u64 apic_base; + +The value of the APIC BASE msr. Only valid if in-kernel local +APIC is not used. Both input and output. + + union { + /* KVM_EXIT_UNKNOWN */ + struct { + __u64 hardware_exit_reason; + } hw; + +If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_UNKNOWN, the vcpu has exited due to unknown +reasons. Further architecture-specific information is available in +hardware_exit_reason. + + /* KVM_EXIT_FAIL_ENTRY */ + struct { + __u64 hardware_entry_failure_reason; + } fail_entry; + +If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_FAIL_ENTRY, the vcpu could not be run due +to unknown reasons. Further architecture-specific information is +available in hardware_entry_failure_reason. + + /* KVM_EXIT_EXCEPTION */ + struct { + __u32 exception; + __u32 error_code; + } ex; + +Unused. + + /* KVM_EXIT_IO */ + struct { +#define KVM_EXIT_IO_IN 0 +#define KVM_EXIT_IO_OUT 1 + __u8 direction; + __u8 size; /* bytes */ + __u16 port; + __u32 count; + __u64 data_offset; /* relative to kvm_run start */ + } io; + +If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_IO_IN or KVM_EXIT_IO_OUT, then the vcpu has +executed a port I/O instruction which could not be satisfied by kvm. +data_offset describes where the data is located (KVM_EXIT_IO_OUT) or +where kvm expects application code to place the data for the next +KVM_RUN invocation (KVM_EXIT_IO_IN). Data format is a patcked array. + + struct { + struct kvm_debug_exit_arch arch; + } debug; + +Unused. + + /* KVM_EXIT_MMIO */ + struct { + __u64 phys_addr; + __u8 data[8]; + __u32 len; + __u8 is_write; + } mmio; + +If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_MMIO or KVM_EXIT_IO_OUT, then the vcpu has +executed a memory-mapped I/O instruction which could not be satisfied +by kvm. The 'data' member contains the written data if 'is_write' is +true, and should be filled by application code otherwise. + + /* KVM_EXIT_HYPERCALL */ + struct { + __u64 nr; + __u64 args[6]; + __u64 ret; + __u32 longmode; + __u32 pad; + } hypercall; + +Unused. + + /* KVM_EXIT_TPR_ACCESS */ + struct { + __u64 rip; + __u32 is_write; + __u32 pad; + } tpr_access; + +To be documented (KVM_TPR_ACCESS_REPORTING). + + /* KVM_EXIT_S390_SIEIC */ + struct { + __u8 icptcode; + __u64 mask; /* psw upper half */ + __u64 addr; /* psw lower half */ + __u16 ipa; + __u32 ipb; + } s390_sieic; + +s390 specific. + + /* KVM_EXIT_S390_RESET */ +#define KVM_S390_RESET_POR 1 +#define KVM_S390_RESET_CLEAR 2 +#define KVM_S390_RESET_SUBSYSTEM 4 +#define KVM_S390_RESET_CPU_INIT 8 +#define KVM_S390_RESET_IPL 16 + __u64 s390_reset_flags; + +s390 specific. + + /* KVM_EXIT_DCR */ + struct { + __u32 dcrn; + __u32 data; + __u8 is_write; + } dcr; + +powerpc specific. + + /* Fix the size of the union. */ + char padding[256]; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index f2296ecedb8..e2ddcdeb61b 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -36,8 +36,6 @@ detailed description): - Bluetooth enable and disable - video output switching, expansion control - ThinkLight on and off - - limited docking and undocking - - UltraBay eject - CMOS/UCMS control - LED control - ACPI sounds @@ -729,131 +727,6 @@ cannot be read or if it is unknown, thinkpad-acpi will report it as "off". It is impossible to know if the status returned through sysfs is valid. -Docking / undocking -- /proc/acpi/ibm/dock ------------------------------------------- - -Docking and undocking (e.g. with the X4 UltraBase) requires some -actions to be taken by the operating system to safely make or break -the electrical connections with the dock. - -The docking feature of this driver generates the following ACPI events: - - ibm/dock GDCK 00000003 00000001 -- eject request - ibm/dock GDCK 00000003 00000002 -- undocked - ibm/dock GDCK 00000000 00000003 -- docked - -NOTE: These events will only be generated if the laptop was docked -when originally booted. This is due to the current lack of support for -hot plugging of devices in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was -booted while not in the dock, the following message is shown in the -logs: - - Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: thinkpad_acpi: dock device not present - -In this case, no dock-related events are generated but the dock and -undock commands described below still work. They can be executed -manually or triggered by Fn key combinations (see the example acpid -configuration files included in the driver tarball package available -on the web site). - -When the eject request button on the dock is pressed, the first event -above is generated. The handler for this event should issue the -following command: - - echo undock > /proc/acpi/ibm/dock - -After the LED on the dock goes off, it is safe to eject the laptop. -Note: if you pressed this key by mistake, go ahead and eject the -laptop, then dock it back in. Otherwise, the dock may not function as -expected. - -When the laptop is docked, the third event above is generated. The -handler for this event should issue the following command to fully -enable the dock: - - echo dock > /proc/acpi/ibm/dock - -The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/dock file shows the current status -of the dock, as provided by the ACPI framework. - -The docking support in this driver does not take care of enabling or -disabling any other devices you may have attached to the dock. For -example, a CD drive plugged into the UltraBase needs to be disabled or -enabled separately. See the provided example acpid configuration files -for how this can be accomplished. - -There is no support yet for PCI devices that may be attached to a -docking station, e.g. in the ThinkPad Dock II. The driver currently -does not recognize, enable or disable such devices. This means that -the only docking stations currently supported are the X-series -UltraBase docks and "dumb" port replicators like the Mini Dock (the -latter don't need any ACPI support, actually). - - -UltraBay eject -- /proc/acpi/ibm/bay ------------------------------------- - -Inserting or ejecting an UltraBay device requires some actions to be -taken by the operating system to safely make or break the electrical -connections with the device. - -This feature generates the following ACPI events: - - ibm/bay MSTR 00000003 00000000 -- eject request - ibm/bay MSTR 00000001 00000000 -- eject lever inserted - -NOTE: These events will only be generated if the UltraBay was present -when the laptop was originally booted (on the X series, the UltraBay -is in the dock, so it may not be present if the laptop was undocked). -This is due to the current lack of support for hot plugging of devices -in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was booted without the -UltraBay, the following message is shown in the logs: - - Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: thinkpad_acpi: bay device not present - -In this case, no bay-related events are generated but the eject -command described below still works. It can be executed manually or -triggered by a hot key combination. - -Sliding the eject lever generates the first event shown above. The -handler for this event should take whatever actions are necessary to -shut down the device in the UltraBay (e.g. call idectl), then issue -the following command: - - echo eject > /proc/acpi/ibm/bay - -After the LED on the UltraBay goes off, it is safe to pull out the -device. - -When the eject lever is inserted, the second event above is -generated. The handler for this event should take whatever actions are -necessary to enable the UltraBay device (e.g. call idectl). - -The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/bay file shows the current status -of the UltraBay, as provided by the ACPI framework. - -EXPERIMENTAL warm eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x (To use -this feature, you need to supply the experimental=1 parameter when -loading the module): - -These models do not have a button near the UltraBay device to request -a hot eject but rather require the laptop to be put to sleep -(suspend-to-ram) before the bay device is ejected or inserted). -The sequence of steps to eject the device is as follows: - - echo eject > /proc/acpi/ibm/bay - put the ThinkPad to sleep - remove the drive - resume from sleep - cat /proc/acpi/ibm/bay should show that the drive was removed - -On the A3x, both the UltraBay 2000 and UltraBay Plus devices are -supported. Use "eject2" instead of "eject" for the second bay. - -Note: the UltraBay eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x is -EXPERIMENTAL and may not work as expected. USE WITH CAUTION! - - CMOS/UCMS control ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index 9ebcd6ef361..950cde6d6e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c @@ -1,7 +1,9 @@ -/*P:100 This is the Launcher code, a simple program which lays out the - * "physical" memory for the new Guest by mapping the kernel image and - * the virtual devices, then opens /dev/lguest to tell the kernel - * about the Guest and control it. :*/ +/*P:100 + * This is the Launcher code, a simple program which lays out the "physical" + * memory for the new Guest by mapping the kernel image and the virtual + * devices, then opens /dev/lguest to tell the kernel about the Guest and + * control it. +:*/ #define _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE #define _GNU_SOURCE #include <stdio.h> @@ -46,13 +48,15 @@ #include "linux/virtio_rng.h" #include "linux/virtio_ring.h" #include "asm/bootparam.h" -/*L:110 We can ignore the 39 include files we need for this program, but I do - * want to draw attention to the use of kernel-style types. +/*L:110 + * We can ignore the 42 include files we need for this program, but I do want + * to draw attention to the use of kernel-style types. * * As Linus said, "C is a Spartan language, and so should your naming be." I * like these abbreviations, so we define them here. Note that u64 is always * unsigned long long, which works on all Linux systems: this means that we can - * use %llu in printf for any u64. */ + * use %llu in printf for any u64. + */ typedef unsigned long long u64; typedef uint32_t u32; typedef uint16_t u16; @@ -69,8 +73,10 @@ typedef uint8_t u8; /* This will occupy 3 pages: it must be a power of 2. */ #define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 256 -/*L:120 verbose is both a global flag and a macro. The C preprocessor allows - * this, and although I wouldn't recommend it, it works quite nicely here. */ +/*L:120 + * verbose is both a global flag and a macro. The C preprocessor allows + * this, and although I wouldn't recommend it, it works quite nicely here. + */ static bool verbose; #define verbose(args...) \ do { if (verbose) printf(args); } while(0) @@ -87,8 +93,7 @@ static int lguest_fd; static unsigned int __thread cpu_id; /* This is our list of devices. */ -struct device_list -{ +struct device_list { /* Counter to assign interrupt numbers. */ unsigned int next_irq; @@ -100,8 +105,7 @@ struct device_list /* A single linked list of devices. */ struct device *dev; - /* And a pointer to the last device for easy append and also for - * configuration appending. */ + /* And a pointer to the last device for easy append. */ struct device *lastdev; }; @@ -109,8 +113,7 @@ struct device_list static struct device_list devices; /* The device structure describes a single device. */ -struct device -{ +struct device { /* The linked-list pointer. */ struct device *next; @@ -135,8 +138,7 @@ struct device }; /* The virtqueue structure describes a queue attached to a device. */ -struct virtqueue -{ +struct virtqueue { struct virtqueue *next; /* Which device owns me. */ @@ -168,20 +170,24 @@ static char **main_args; /* The original tty settings to restore on exit. */ static struct termios orig_term; -/* We have to be careful with barriers: our devices are all run in separate +/* + * We have to be careful with barriers: our devices are all run in separate * threads and so we need to make sure that changes visible to the Guest happen - * in precise order. */ + * in precise order. + */ #define wmb() __asm__ __volatile__("" : : : "memory") #define mb() __asm__ __volatile__("" : : : "memory") -/* Convert an iovec element to the given type. +/* + * Convert an iovec element to the given type. * * This is a fairly ugly trick: we need to know the size of the type and * alignment requirement to check the pointer is kosher. It's also nice to * have the name of the type in case we report failure. * * Typing those three things all the time is cumbersome and error prone, so we - * have a macro which sets them all up and passes to the real function. */ + * have a macro which sets them all up and passes to the real function. + */ #define convert(iov, type) \ ((type *)_convert((iov), sizeof(type), __alignof__(type), #type)) @@ -198,8 +204,10 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align, /* Wrapper for the last available index. Makes it easier to change. */ #define lg_last_avail(vq) ((vq)->last_avail_idx) -/* The virtio configuration space is defined to be little-endian. x86 is - * little-endian too, but it's nice to be explicit so we have these helpers. */ +/* + * The virtio configuration space is defined to be little-endian. x86 is + * little-endian too, but it's nice to be explicit so we have these helpers. + */ #define cpu_to_le16(v16) (v16) #define cpu_to_le32(v32) (v32) #define cpu_to_le64(v64) (v64) @@ -241,11 +249,12 @@ static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev) + dev->num_vq * sizeof(struct lguest_vqconfig); } -/*L:100 The Launcher code itself takes us out into userspace, that scary place - * where pointers run wild and free! Unfortunately, like most userspace - * programs, it's quite boring (which is why everyone likes to hack on the - * kernel!). Perhaps if you make up an Lguest Drinking Game at this point, it - * will get you through this section. Or, maybe not. +/*L:100 + * The Launcher code itself takes us out into userspace, that scary place where + * pointers run wild and free! Unfortunately, like most userspace programs, + * it's quite boring (which is why everyone likes to hack on the kernel!). + * Perhaps if you make up an Lguest Drinking Game at this point, it will get + * you through this section. Or, maybe not. * * The Launcher sets up a big chunk of memory to be the Guest's "physical" * memory and stores it in "guest_base". In other words, Guest physical == @@ -253,7 +262,8 @@ static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev) * * This can be tough to get your head around, but usually it just means that we * use these trivial conversion functions when the Guest gives us it's - * "physical" addresses: */ + * "physical" addresses: + */ static void *from_guest_phys(unsigned long addr) { return guest_base + addr; @@ -268,7 +278,8 @@ static unsigned long to_guest_phys(const void *addr) * Loading the Kernel. * * We start with couple of simple helper routines. open_or_die() avoids - * error-checking code cluttering the callers: */ + * error-checking code cluttering the callers: + */ static int open_or_die(const char *name, int flags) { int fd = open(name, flags); @@ -283,12 +294,19 @@ static void *map_zeroed_pages(unsigned int num) int fd = open_or_die("/dev/zero", O_RDONLY); void *addr; - /* We use a private mapping (ie. if we write to the page, it will be - * copied). */ + /* + * We use a private mapping (ie. if we write to the page, it will be + * copied). + */ addr = mmap(NULL, getpagesize() * num, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); if (addr == MAP_FAILED) err(1, "Mmaping %u pages of /dev/zero", num); + + /* + * One neat mmap feature is that you can close the fd, and it + * stays mapped. + */ close(fd); return addr; @@ -305,20 +323,24 @@ static void *get_pages(unsigned int num) return addr; } -/* This routine is used to load the kernel or initrd. It tries mmap, but if +/* + * This routine is used to load the kernel or initrd. It tries mmap, but if * that fails (Plan 9's kernel file isn't nicely aligned on page boundaries), - * it falls back to reading the memory in. */ + * it falls back to reading the memory in. + */ static void map_at(int fd, void *addr, unsigned long offset, unsigned long len) { ssize_t r; - /* We map writable even though for some segments are marked read-only. + /* + * We map writable even though for some segments are marked read-only. * The kernel really wants to be writable: it patches its own * instructions. * * MAP_PRIVATE means that the page won't be copied until a write is * done to it. This allows us to share untouched memory between - * Guests. */ + * Guests. + */ if (mmap(addr, len, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, MAP_FIXED|MAP_PRIVATE, fd, offset) != MAP_FAILED) return; @@ -329,7 +351,8 @@ static void map_at(int fd, void *addr, unsigned long offset, unsigned long len) err(1, "Reading offset %lu len %lu gave %zi", offset, len, r); } -/* This routine takes an open vmlinux image, which is in ELF, and maps it into +/* + * This routine takes an open vmlinux image, which is in ELF, and maps it into * the Guest memory. ELF = Embedded Linking Format, which is the format used * by all modern binaries on Linux including the kernel. * @@ -337,23 +360,28 @@ static void map_at(int fd, void *addr, unsigned long offset, unsigned long len) * address. We use the physical address; the Guest will map itself to the * virtual address. * - * We return the starting address. */ + * We return the starting address. + */ static unsigned long map_elf(int elf_fd, const Elf32_Ehdr *ehdr) { Elf32_Phdr phdr[ehdr->e_phnum]; unsigned int i; - /* Sanity checks on the main ELF header: an x86 executable with a - * reasonable number of correctly-sized program headers. */ + /* + * Sanity checks on the main ELF header: an x86 executable with a + * reasonable number of correctly-sized program headers. + */ if (ehdr->e_type != ET_EXEC || ehdr->e_machine != EM_386 || ehdr->e_phentsize != sizeof(Elf32_Phdr) || ehdr->e_phnum < 1 || ehdr->e_phnum > 65536U/sizeof(Elf32_Phdr)) errx(1, "Malformed elf header"); - /* An ELF executable contains an ELF header and a number of "program" + /* + * An ELF executable contains an ELF header and a number of "program" * headers which indicate which parts ("segments") of the program to - * load where. */ + * load where. + */ /* We read in all the program headers at once: */ if (lseek(elf_fd, ehdr->e_phoff, SEEK_SET) < 0) @@ -361,8 +389,10 @@ static unsigned long map_elf(int elf_fd, const Elf32_Ehdr *ehdr) if (read(elf_fd, phdr, sizeof(phdr)) != sizeof(phdr)) err(1, "Reading program headers"); - /* Try all the headers: there are usually only three. A read-only one, - * a read-write one, and a "note" section which we don't load. */ + /* + * Try all the headers: there are usually only three. A read-only one, + * a read-write one, and a "note" section which we don't load. + */ for (i = 0; i < ehdr->e_phnum; i++) { /* If this isn't a loadable segment, we ignore it */ if (phdr[i].p_type != PT_LOAD) @@ -380,13 +410,15 @@ static unsigned long map_elf(int elf_fd, const Elf32_Ehdr *ehdr) return ehdr->e_entry; } -/*L:150 A bzImage, unlike an ELF file, is not meant to be loaded. You're - * supposed to jump into it and it will unpack itself. We used to have to - * perform some hairy magic because the unpacking code scared me. +/*L:150 + * A bzImage, unlike an ELF file, is not meant to be loaded. You're supposed + * to jump into it and it will unpack itself. We used to have to perform some + * hairy magic because the unpacking code scared me. * * Fortunately, Jeremy Fitzhardinge convinced me it wasn't that hard and wrote * a small patch to jump over the tricky bits in the Guest, so now we just read - * the funky header so we know where in the file to load, and away we go! */ + * the funky header so we know where in the file to load, and away we go! + */ static unsigned long load_bzimage(int fd) { struct boot_params boot; @@ -394,8 +426,10 @@ static unsigned long load_bzimage(int fd) /* Modern bzImages get loaded at 1M. */ void *p = from_guest_phys(0x100000); - /* Go back to the start of the file and read the header. It should be - * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt) */ + /* + * Go back to the start of the file and read the header. It should be + * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt) + */ lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); read(fd, &boot, sizeof(boot)); @@ -414,9 +448,11 @@ static unsigned long load_bzimage(int fd) return boot.hdr.code32_start; } -/*L:140 Loading the kernel is easy when it's a "vmlinux", but most kernels +/*L:140 + * Loading the kernel is easy when it's a "vmlinux", but most kernels * come wrapped up in the self-decompressing "bzImage" format. With a little - * work, we can load those, too. */ + * work, we can load those, too. + */ static unsigned long load_kernel(int fd) { Elf32_Ehdr hdr; @@ -433,24 +469,28 @@ static unsigned long load_kernel(int fd) return load_bzimage(fd); } -/* This is a trivial little helper to align pages. Andi Kleen hated it because +/* + * This is a trivial little helper to align pages. Andi Kleen hated it because * it calls getpagesize() twice: "it's dumb code." * * Kernel guys get really het up about optimization, even when it's not - * necessary. I leave this code as a reaction against that. */ + * necessary. I leave this code as a reaction against that. + */ static inline unsigned long page_align(unsigned long addr) { /* Add upwards and truncate downwards. */ return ((addr + getpagesize()-1) & ~(getpagesize()-1)); } -/*L:180 An "initial ram disk" is a disk image loaded into memory along with - * the kernel which the kernel can use to boot from without needing any - * drivers. Most distributions now use this as standard: the initrd contains - * the code to load the appropriate driver modules for the current machine. +/*L:180 + * An "initial ram disk" is a disk image loaded into memory along with the + * kernel which the kernel can use to boot from without needing any drivers. + * Most distributions now use this as standard: the initrd contains the code to + * load the appropriate driver modules for the current machine. * * Importantly, James Morris works for RedHat, and Fedora uses initrds for its - * kernels. He sent me this (and tells me when I break it). */ + * kernels. He sent me this (and tells me when I break it). + */ static unsigned long load_initrd(const char *name, unsigned long mem) { int ifd; @@ -462,12 +502,16 @@ static unsigned long load_initrd(const char *name, unsigned long mem) if (fstat(ifd, &st) < 0) err(1, "fstat() on initrd '%s'", name); - /* We map the initrd at the top of memory, but mmap wants it to be - * page-aligned, so we round the size up for that. */ + /* + * We map the initrd at the top of memory, but mmap wants it to be + * page-aligned, so we round the size up for that. + */ len = page_align(st.st_size); map_at(ifd, from_guest_phys(mem - len), 0, st.st_size); - /* Once a file is mapped, you can close the file descriptor. It's a - * little odd, but quite useful. */ + /* + * Once a file is mapped, you can close the file descriptor. It's a + * little odd, but quite useful. + */ close(ifd); verbose("mapped initrd %s size=%lu @ %p\n", name, len, (void*)mem-len); @@ -476,8 +520,10 @@ static unsigned long load_initrd(const char *name, unsigned long mem) } /*:*/ -/* Simple routine to roll all the commandline arguments together with spaces - * between them. */ +/* + * Simple routine to roll all the commandline arguments together with spaces + * between them. + */ static void concat(char *dst, char *args[]) { unsigned int i, len = 0; @@ -494,10 +540,12 @@ static void concat(char *dst, char *args[]) dst[len] = '\0'; } -/*L:185 This is where we actually tell the kernel to initialize the Guest. We +/*L:185 + * This is where we actually tell the kernel to initialize the Guest. We * saw the arguments it expects when we looked at initialize() in lguest_user.c: * the base of Guest "physical" memory, the top physical page to allow and the - * entry point for the Guest. */ + * entry point for the Guest. + */ static void tell_kernel(unsigned long start) { unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_INITIALIZE, @@ -511,7 +559,7 @@ static void tell_kernel(unsigned long start) } /*:*/ -/* +/*L:200 * Device Handling. * * When the Guest gives us a buffer, it sends an array of addresses and sizes. @@ -522,20 +570,26 @@ static void tell_kernel(unsigned long start) static void *_check_pointer(unsigned long addr, unsigned int size, unsigned int line) { - /* We have to separately check addr and addr+size, because size could - * be huge and addr + size might wrap around. */ + /* + * We have to separately check addr and addr+size, because size could + * be huge and addr + size might wrap around. + */ if (addr >= guest_limit || addr + size >= guest_limit) errx(1, "%s:%i: Invalid address %#lx", __FILE__, line, addr); - /* We return a pointer for the caller's convenience, now we know it's - * safe to use. */ + /* + * We return a pointer for the caller's convenience, now we know it's + * safe to use. + */ return from_guest_phys(addr); } /* A macro which transparently hands the line number to the real function. */ #define check_pointer(addr,size) _check_pointer(addr, size, __LINE__) -/* Each buffer in the virtqueues is actually a chain of descriptors. This +/* + * Each buffer in the virtqueues is actually a chain of descriptors. This * function returns the next descriptor in the chain, or vq->vring.num if we're - * at the end. */ + * at the end. + */ static unsigned next_desc(struct vring_desc *desc, unsigned int i, unsigned int max) { @@ -556,7 +610,10 @@ static unsigned next_desc(struct vring_desc *desc, return next; } -/* This actually sends the interrupt for this virtqueue */ +/* + * This actually sends the interrupt for this virtqueue, if we've used a + * buffer. + */ static void trigger_irq(struct virtqueue *vq) { unsigned long buf[] = { LHREQ_IRQ, vq->config.irq }; @@ -576,12 +633,14 @@ static void trigger_irq(struct virtqueue *vq) err(1, "Triggering irq %i", vq->config.irq); } -/* This looks in the virtqueue and for the first available buffer, and converts +/* + * This looks in the virtqueue for the first available buffer, and converts * it to an iovec for convenient access. Since descriptors consist of some * number of output then some number of input descriptors, it's actually two * iovecs, but we pack them into one and note how many of each there were. * - * This function returns the descriptor number found. */ + * This function waits if necessary, and returns the descriptor number found. + */ static unsigned wait_for_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, struct iovec iov[], unsigned int *out_num, unsigned int *in_num) @@ -590,17 +649,23 @@ static unsigned wait_for_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, struct vring_desc *desc; u16 last_avail = lg_last_avail(vq); + /* There's nothing available? */ while (last_avail == vq->vring.avail->idx) { u64 event; - /* OK, tell Guest about progress up to now. */ + /* + * Since we're about to sleep, now is a good time to tell the + * Guest about what we've used up to now. + */ trigger_irq(vq); /* OK, now we need to know about added descriptors. */ vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; - /* They could have slipped one in as we were doing that: make - * sure it's written, then check again. */ + /* + * They could have slipped one in as we were doing that: make + * sure it's written, then check again. + */ mb(); if (last_avail != vq->vring.avail->idx) { vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; @@ -620,8 +685,10 @@ static unsigned wait_for_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, errx(1, "Guest moved used index from %u to %u", last_avail, vq->vring.avail->idx); - /* Grab the next descriptor number they're advertising, and increment - * the index we've seen. */ + /* + * Grab the next descriptor number they're advertising, and increment + * the index we've seen. + */ head = vq->vring.avail->ring[last_avail % vq->vring.num]; lg_last_avail(vq)++; @@ -636,8 +703,10 @@ static unsigned wait_for_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, desc = vq->vring.desc; i = head; - /* If this is an indirect entry, then this buffer contains a descriptor - * table which we handle as if it's any normal descriptor chain. */ + /* + * If this is an indirect entry, then this buffer contains a descriptor + * table which we handle as if it's any normal descriptor chain. + */ if (desc[i].flags & VRING_DESC_F_INDIRECT) { if (desc[i].len % sizeof(struct vring_desc)) errx(1, "Invalid size for indirect buffer table"); @@ -656,8 +725,10 @@ static unsigned wait_for_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, if (desc[i].flags & VRING_DESC_F_WRITE) (*in_num)++; else { - /* If it's an output descriptor, they're all supposed - * to come before any input descriptors. */ + /* + * If it's an output descriptor, they're all supposed + * to come before any input descriptors. + */ if (*in_num) errx(1, "Descriptor has out after in"); (*out_num)++; @@ -671,14 +742,19 @@ static unsigned wait_for_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, return head; } -/* After we've used one of their buffers, we tell them about it. We'll then - * want to send them an interrupt, using trigger_irq(). */ +/* + * After we've used one of their buffers, we tell the Guest about it. Sometime + * later we'll want to send them an interrupt using trigger_irq(); note that + * wait_for_vq_desc() does that for us if it has to wait. + */ static void add_used(struct virtqueue *vq, unsigned int head, int len) { struct vring_used_elem *used; - /* The virtqueue contains a ring of used buffers. Get a pointer to the - * next entry in that used ring. */ + /* + * The virtqueue contains a ring of used buffers. Get a pointer to the + * next entry in that used ring. + */ used = &vq->vring.used->ring[vq->vring.used->idx % vq->vring.num]; used->id = head; used->len = len; @@ -698,9 +774,9 @@ static void add_used_and_trigger(struct virtqueue *vq, unsigned head, int len) /* * The Console * - * We associate some data with the console for our exit hack. */ -struct console_abort -{ + * We associate some data with the console for our exit hack. + */ +struct console_abort { /* How many times have they hit ^C? */ int count; /* When did they start? */ @@ -715,30 +791,35 @@ static void console_input(struct virtqueue *vq) struct console_abort *abort = vq->dev->priv; struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num]; - /* Make sure there's a descriptor waiting. */ + /* Make sure there's a descriptor available. */ head = wait_for_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num); if (out_num) errx(1, "Output buffers in console in queue?"); - /* Read it in. */ + /* Read into it. This is where we usually wait. */ len = readv(STDIN_FILENO, iov, in_num); if (len <= 0) { /* Ran out of input? */ warnx("Failed to get console input, ignoring console."); - /* For simplicity, dying threads kill the whole Launcher. So - * just nap here. */ + /* + * For simplicity, dying threads kill the whole Launcher. So + * just nap here. + */ for (;;) pause(); } + /* Tell the Guest we used a buffer. */ add_used_and_trigger(vq, head, len); - /* Three ^C within one second? Exit. + /* + * Three ^C within one second? Exit. * * This is such a hack, but works surprisingly well. Each ^C has to * be in a buffer by itself, so they can't be too fast. But we check * that we get three within about a second, so they can't be too - * slow. */ + * slow. + */ if (len != 1 || ((char *)iov[0].iov_base)[0] != 3) { abort->count = 0; return; @@ -763,15 +844,23 @@ static void console_output(struct virtqueue *vq) unsigned int head, out, in; struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num]; + /* We usually wait in here, for the Guest to give us something. */ head = wait_for_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out, &in); if (in) errx(1, "Input buffers in console output queue?"); + + /* writev can return a partial write, so we loop here. */ while (!iov_empty(iov, out)) { int len = writev(STDOUT_FILENO, iov, out); if (len <= 0) err(1, "Write to stdout gave %i", len); iov_consume(iov, out, len); } + + /* + * We're finished with that buffer: if we're going to sleep, + * wait_for_vq_desc() will prod the Guest with an interrupt. + */ add_used(vq, head, 0); } @@ -791,15 +880,30 @@ static void net_output(struct virtqueue *vq) unsigned int head, out, in; struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num]; + /* We usually wait in here for the Guest to give us a packet. */ head = wait_for_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out, &in); if (in) errx(1, "Input buffers in net output queue?"); + /* + * Send the whole thing through to /dev/net/tun. It expects the exact + * same format: what a coincidence! + */ if (writev(net_info->tunfd, iov, out) < 0) errx(1, "Write to tun failed?"); + + /* + * Done with that one; wait_for_vq_desc() will send the interrupt if + * all packets are processed. + */ add_used(vq, head, 0); } -/* Will reading from this file descriptor block? */ +/* + * Handling network input is a bit trickier, because I've tried to optimize it. + * + * First we have a helper routine which tells is if from this file descriptor + * (ie. the /dev/net/tun device) will block: + */ static bool will_block(int fd) { fd_set fdset; @@ -809,8 +913,11 @@ static bool will_block(int fd) return select(fd+1, &fdset, NULL, NULL, &zero) != 1; } -/* This is where we handle packets coming in from the tun device to our - * Guest. */ +/* + * This handles packets coming in from the tun device to our Guest. Like all + * service routines, it gets called again as soon as it returns, so you don't + * see a while(1) loop here. + */ static void net_input(struct virtqueue *vq) { int len; @@ -818,21 +925,38 @@ static void net_input(struct virtqueue *vq) struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num]; struct net_info *net_info = vq->dev->priv; + /* + * Get a descriptor to write an incoming packet into. This will also + * send an interrupt if they're out of descriptors. + */ head = wait_for_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out, &in); if (out) errx(1, "Output buffers in net input queue?"); - /* Deliver interrupt now, since we're about to sleep. */ + /* + * If it looks like we'll block reading from the tun device, send them + * an interrupt. + */ if (vq->pending_used && will_block(net_info->tunfd)) trigger_irq(vq); + /* + * Read in the packet. This is where we normally wait (when there's no + * incoming network traffic). + */ len = readv(net_info->tunfd, iov, in); if (len <= 0) err(1, "Failed to read from tun."); + + /* + * Mark that packet buffer as used, but don't interrupt here. We want + * to wait until we've done as much work as we can. + */ add_used(vq, head, len); } +/*:*/ -/* This is the helper to create threads. */ +/* This is the helper to create threads: run the service routine in a loop. */ static int do_thread(void *_vq) { struct virtqueue *vq = _vq; @@ -842,8 +966,10 @@ static int do_thread(void *_vq) return 0; } -/* When a child dies, we kill our entire process group with SIGTERM. This - * also has the side effect that the shell restores the console for us! */ +/* + * When a child dies, we kill our entire process group with SIGTERM. This + * also has the side effect that the shell restores the console for us! + */ static void kill_launcher(int signal) { kill(0, SIGTERM); @@ -878,11 +1004,15 @@ static void reset_device(struct device *dev) signal(SIGCHLD, (void *)kill_launcher); } +/*L:216 + * This actually creates the thread which services the virtqueue for a device. + */ static void create_thread(struct virtqueue *vq) { - /* Create stack for thread and run it. Since stack grows - * upwards, we point the stack pointer to the end of this - * region. */ + /* + * Create stack for thread. Since the stack grows upwards, we point + * the stack pointer to the end of this region. + */ char *stack = malloc(32768); unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_EVENTFD, vq->config.pfn*getpagesize(), 0 }; @@ -893,17 +1023,22 @@ static void create_thread(struct virtqueue *vq) err(1, "Creating eventfd"); args[2] = vq->eventfd; - /* Attach an eventfd to this virtqueue: it will go off - * when the Guest does an LHCALL_NOTIFY for this vq. */ + /* + * Attach an eventfd to this virtqueue: it will go off when the Guest + * does an LHCALL_NOTIFY for this vq. + */ if (write(lguest_fd, &args, sizeof(args)) != 0) err(1, "Attaching eventfd"); - /* CLONE_VM: because it has to access the Guest memory, and - * SIGCHLD so we get a signal if it dies. */ + /* + * CLONE_VM: because it has to access the Guest memory, and SIGCHLD so + * we get a signal if it dies. + */ vq->thread = clone(do_thread, stack + 32768, CLONE_VM | SIGCHLD, vq); if (vq->thread == (pid_t)-1) err(1, "Creating clone"); - /* We close our local copy, now the child has it. */ + + /* We close our local copy now the child has it. */ close(vq->eventfd); } @@ -955,7 +1090,10 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev) } } -/* This is the generic routine we call when the Guest uses LHCALL_NOTIFY. */ +/*L:215 + * This is the generic routine we call when the Guest uses LHCALL_NOTIFY. In + * particular, it's used to notify us of device status changes during boot. + */ static void handle_output(unsigned long addr) { struct device *i; @@ -964,25 +1102,42 @@ static void handle_output(unsigned long addr) for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) { struct virtqueue *vq; - /* Notifications to device descriptors update device status. */ + /* + * Notifications to device descriptors mean they updated the + * device status. + */ if (from_guest_phys(addr) == i->desc) { update_device_status(i); return; } - /* Devices *can* be used before status is set to DRIVER_OK. */ + /* + * Devices *can* be used before status is set to DRIVER_OK. + * The original plan was that they would never do this: they + * would always finish setting up their status bits before + * actually touching the virtqueues. In practice, we allowed + * them to, and they do (eg. the disk probes for partition + * tables as part of initialization). + * + * If we see this, we start the device: once it's running, we + * expect the device to catch all the notifications. + */ for (vq = i->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) { if (addr != vq->config.pfn*getpagesize()) continue; if (i->running) errx(1, "Notification on running %s", i->name); + /* This just calls create_thread() for each virtqueue */ start_device(i); return; } } - /* Early console write is done using notify on a nul-terminated string - * in Guest memory. */ + /* + * Early console write is done using notify on a nul-terminated string + * in Guest memory. It's also great for hacking debugging messages + * into a Guest. + */ if (addr >= guest_limit) errx(1, "Bad NOTIFY %#lx", addr); @@ -998,10 +1153,12 @@ static void handle_output(unsigned long addr) * routines to allocate and manage them. */ -/* The layout of the device page is a "struct lguest_device_desc" followed by a +/* + * The layout of the device page is a "struct lguest_device_desc" followed by a * number of virtqueue descriptors, then two sets of feature bits, then an * array of configuration bytes. This routine returns the configuration - * pointer. */ + * pointer. + */ static u8 *device_config(const struct device *dev) { return (void *)(dev->desc + 1) @@ -1009,9 +1166,11 @@ static u8 *device_config(const struct device *dev) + dev->feature_len * 2; } -/* This routine allocates a new "struct lguest_device_desc" from descriptor +/* + * This routine allocates a new "struct lguest_device_desc" from descriptor * table page just above the Guest's normal memory. It returns a pointer to - * that descriptor. */ + * that descriptor. + */ static struct lguest_device_desc *new_dev_desc(u16 type) { struct lguest_device_desc d = { .type = type }; @@ -1032,8 +1191,10 @@ static struct lguest_device_desc *new_dev_desc(u16 type) return memcpy(p, &d, sizeof(d)); } -/* Each device descriptor is followed by the description of its virtqueues. We - * specify how many descriptors the virtqueue is to have. */ +/* + * Each device descriptor is followed by the description of its virtqueues. We + * specify how many descriptors the virtqueue is to have. + */ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, void (*service)(struct virtqueue *)) { @@ -1050,6 +1211,11 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, vq->next = NULL; vq->last_avail_idx = 0; vq->dev = dev; + + /* + * This is the routine the service thread will run, and its Process ID + * once it's running. + */ vq->service = service; vq->thread = (pid_t)-1; @@ -1061,10 +1227,12 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, /* Initialize the vring. */ vring_init(&vq->vring, num_descs, p, LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN); - /* Append virtqueue to this device's descriptor. We use + /* + * Append virtqueue to this device's descriptor. We use * device_config() to get the end of the device's current virtqueues; * we check that we haven't added any config or feature information - * yet, otherwise we'd be overwriting them. */ + * yet, otherwise we'd be overwriting them. + */ assert(dev->desc->config_len == 0 && dev->desc->feature_len == 0); memcpy(device_config(dev), &vq->config, sizeof(vq->config)); dev->num_vq++; @@ -1072,14 +1240,18 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, verbose("Virtqueue page %#lx\n", to_guest_phys(p)); - /* Add to tail of list, so dev->vq is first vq, dev->vq->next is - * second. */ + /* + * Add to tail of list, so dev->vq is first vq, dev->vq->next is + * second. + */ for (i = &dev->vq; *i; i = &(*i)->next); *i = vq; } -/* The first half of the feature bitmask is for us to advertise features. The - * second half is for the Guest to accept features. */ +/* + * The first half of the feature bitmask is for us to advertise features. The + * second half is for the Guest to accept features. + */ static void add_feature(struct device *dev, unsigned bit) { u8 *features = get_feature_bits(dev); @@ -1093,9 +1265,11 @@ static void add_feature(struct device *dev, unsigned bit) features[bit / CHAR_BIT] |= (1 << (bit % CHAR_BIT)); } -/* This routine sets the configuration fields for an existing device's +/* + * This routine sets the configuration fields for an existing device's * descriptor. It only works for the last device, but that's OK because that's - * how we use it. */ + * how we use it. + */ static void set_config(struct device *dev, unsigned len, const void *conf) { /* Check we haven't overflowed our single page. */ @@ -1105,12 +1279,18 @@ static void set_config(struct device *dev, unsigned len, const void *conf) /* Copy in the config information, and store the length. */ memcpy(device_config(dev), conf, len); dev->desc->config_len = len; + + /* Size must fit in config_len field (8 bits)! */ + assert(dev->desc->config_len == len); } -/* This routine does all the creation and setup of a new device, including - * calling new_dev_desc() to allocate the descriptor and device memory. +/* + * This routine does all the creation and setup of a new device, including + * calling new_dev_desc() to allocate the descriptor and device memory. We + * don't actually start the service threads until later. * - * See what I mean about userspace being boring? */ + * See what I mean about userspace being boring? + */ static struct device *new_device(const char *name, u16 type) { struct device *dev = malloc(sizeof(*dev)); @@ -1123,10 +1303,12 @@ static struct device *new_device(const char *name, u16 type) dev->num_vq = 0; dev->running = false; - /* Append to device list. Prepending to a single-linked list is + /* + * Append to device list. Prepending to a single-linked list is * easier, but the user expects the devices to be arranged on the bus * in command-line order. The first network device on the command line - * is eth0, the first block device /dev/vda, etc. */ + * is eth0, the first block device /dev/vda, etc. + */ if (devices.lastdev) devices.lastdev->next = dev; else @@ -1136,8 +1318,10 @@ static struct device *new_device(const char *name, u16 type) return dev; } -/* Our first setup routine is the console. It's a fairly simple device, but - * UNIX tty handling makes it uglier than it could be. */ +/* + * Our first setup routine is the console. It's a fairly simple device, but + * UNIX tty handling makes it uglier than it could be. + */ static void setup_console(void) { struct device *dev; @@ -1145,8 +1329,10 @@ static void setup_console(void) /* If we can save the initial standard input settings... */ if (tcgetattr(STDIN_FILENO, &orig_term) == 0) { struct termios term = orig_term; - /* Then we turn off echo, line buffering and ^C etc. We want a - * raw input stream to the Guest. */ + /* + * Then we turn off echo, line buffering and ^C etc: We want a + * raw input stream to the Guest. + */ term.c_lflag &= ~(ISIG|ICANON|ECHO); tcsetattr(STDIN_FILENO, TCSANOW, &term); } @@ -1157,10 +1343,12 @@ static void setup_console(void) dev->priv = malloc(sizeof(struct console_abort)); ((struct console_abort *)dev->priv)->count = 0; - /* The console needs two virtqueues: the input then the output. When + /* + * The console needs two virtqueues: the input then the output. When * they put something the input queue, we make sure we're listening to * stdin. When they put something in the output queue, we write it to - * stdout. */ + * stdout. + */ add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, console_input); add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, console_output); @@ -1168,7 +1356,8 @@ static void setup_console(void) } /*:*/ -/*M:010 Inter-guest networking is an interesting area. Simplest is to have a +/*M:010 + * Inter-guest networking is an interesting area. Simplest is to have a * --sharenet=<name> option which opens or creates a named pipe. This can be * used to send packets to another guest in a 1:1 manner. * @@ -1182,7 +1371,8 @@ static void setup_console(void) * multiple inter-guest channels behind one interface, although it would * require some manner of hotplugging new virtio channels. * - * Finally, we could implement a virtio network switch in the kernel. :*/ + * Finally, we could implement a virtio network switch in the kernel. +:*/ static u32 str2ip(const char *ipaddr) { @@ -1207,11 +1397,13 @@ static void str2mac(const char *macaddr, unsigned char mac[6]) mac[5] = m[5]; } -/* This code is "adapted" from libbridge: it attaches the Host end of the +/* + * This code is "adapted" from libbridge: it attaches the Host end of the * network device to the bridge device specified by the command line. * * This is yet another James Morris contribution (I'm an IP-level guy, so I - * dislike bridging), and I just try not to break it. */ + * dislike bridging), and I just try not to break it. + */ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name) { int ifidx; @@ -1231,9 +1423,11 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name) err(1, "can't add %s to bridge %s", if_name, br_name); } -/* This sets up the Host end of the network device with an IP address, brings +/* + * This sets up the Host end of the network device with an IP address, brings * it up so packets will flow, the copies the MAC address into the hwaddr - * pointer. */ + * pointer. + */ static void configure_device(int fd, const char *tapif, u32 ipaddr) { struct ifreq ifr; @@ -1260,10 +1454,12 @@ static int get_tun_device(char tapif[IFNAMSIZ]) /* Start with this zeroed. Messy but sure. */ memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); - /* We open the /dev/net/tun device and tell it we want a tap device. A + /* + * We open the /dev/net/tun device and tell it we want a tap device. A * tap device is like a tun device, only somehow different. To tell * the truth, I completely blundered my way through this code, but it - * works now! */ + * works now! + */ netfd = open_or_die("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR); ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI | IFF_VNET_HDR; strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "tap%d"); @@ -1274,18 +1470,22 @@ static int get_tun_device(char tapif[IFNAMSIZ]) TUN_F_CSUM|TUN_F_TSO4|TUN_F_TSO6|TUN_F_TSO_ECN) != 0) err(1, "Could not set features for tun device"); - /* We don't need checksums calculated for packets coming in this - * device: trust us! */ + /* + * We don't need checksums calculated for packets coming in this + * device: trust us! + */ ioctl(netfd, TUNSETNOCSUM, 1); memcpy(tapif, ifr.ifr_name, IFNAMSIZ); return netfd; } -/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network. This can either use bridging or +/*L:195 + * Our network is a Host<->Guest network. This can either use bridging or * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card. We - * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */ + * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. + */ static void setup_tun_net(char *arg) { struct device *dev; @@ -1302,13 +1502,14 @@ static void setup_tun_net(char *arg) dev = new_device("net", VIRTIO_ID_NET); dev->priv = net_info; - /* Network devices need a receive and a send queue, just like - * console. */ + /* Network devices need a recv and a send queue, just like console. */ add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, net_input); add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, net_output); - /* We need a socket to perform the magic network ioctls to bring up the - * tap interface, connect to the bridge etc. Any socket will do! */ + /* + * We need a socket to perform the magic network ioctls to bring up the + * tap interface, connect to the bridge etc. Any socket will do! + */ ipfd = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, IPPROTO_IP); if (ipfd < 0) err(1, "opening IP socket"); @@ -1362,39 +1563,31 @@ static void setup_tun_net(char *arg) verbose("device %u: tun %s: %s\n", devices.device_num, tapif, arg); } - -/* Our block (disk) device should be really simple: the Guest asks for a block - * number and we read or write that position in the file. Unfortunately, that - * was amazingly slow: the Guest waits until the read is finished before - * running anything else, even if it could have been doing useful work. - * - * We could use async I/O, except it's reputed to suck so hard that characters - * actually go missing from your code when you try to use it. - * - * So we farm the I/O out to thread, and communicate with it via a pipe. */ +/*:*/ /* This hangs off device->priv. */ -struct vblk_info -{ +struct vblk_info { /* The size of the file. */ off64_t len; /* The file descriptor for the file. */ int fd; - /* IO thread listens on this file descriptor [0]. */ - int workpipe[2]; - - /* IO thread writes to this file descriptor to mark it done, then - * Launcher triggers interrupt to Guest. */ - int done_fd; }; /*L:210 * The Disk * - * Remember that the block device is handled by a separate I/O thread. We head - * straight into the core of that thread here: + * The disk only has one virtqueue, so it only has one thread. It is really + * simple: the Guest asks for a block number and we read or write that position + * in the file. + * + * Before we serviced each virtqueue in a separate thread, that was unacceptably + * slow: the Guest waits until the read is finished before running anything + * else, even if it could have been doing useful work. + * + * We could have used async I/O, except it's reputed to suck so hard that + * characters actually go missing from your code when you try to use it. */ static void blk_request(struct virtqueue *vq) { @@ -1406,47 +1599,64 @@ static void blk_request(struct virtqueue *vq) struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num]; off64_t off; - /* Get the next request. */ + /* + * Get the next request, where we normally wait. It triggers the + * interrupt to acknowledge previously serviced requests (if any). + */ head = wait_for_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num); - /* Every block request should contain at least one output buffer + /* + * Every block request should contain at least one output buffer * (detailing the location on disk and the type of request) and one - * input buffer (to hold the result). */ + * input buffer (to hold the result). + */ if (out_num == 0 || in_num == 0) errx(1, "Bad virtblk cmd %u out=%u in=%u", head, out_num, in_num); out = convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_blk_outhdr); in = convert(&iov[out_num+in_num-1], u8); + /* + * For historical reasons, block operations are expressed in 512 byte + * "sectors". + */ off = out->sector * 512; - /* The block device implements "barriers", where the Guest indicates + /* + * The block device implements "barriers", where the Guest indicates * that it wants all previous writes to occur before this write. We * don't have a way of asking our kernel to do a barrier, so we just - * synchronize all the data in the file. Pretty poor, no? */ + * synchronize all the data in the file. Pretty poor, no? + */ if (out->type & VIRTIO_BLK_T_BARRIER) fdatasync(vblk->fd); - /* In general the virtio block driver is allowed to try SCSI commands. - * It'd be nice if we supported eject, for example, but we don't. */ + /* + * In general the virtio block driver is allowed to try SCSI commands. + * It'd be nice if we supported eject, for example, but we don't. + */ if (out->type & VIRTIO_BLK_T_SCSI_CMD) { fprintf(stderr, "Scsi commands unsupported\n"); *in = VIRTIO_BLK_S_UNSUPP; wlen = sizeof(*in); } else if (out->type & VIRTIO_BLK_T_OUT) { - /* Write */ - - /* Move to the right location in the block file. This can fail - * if they try to write past end. */ + /* + * Write + * + * Move to the right location in the block file. This can fail + * if they try to write past end. + */ if (lseek64(vblk->fd, off, SEEK_SET) != off) err(1, "Bad seek to sector %llu", out->sector); ret = writev(vblk->fd, iov+1, out_num-1); verbose("WRITE to sector %llu: %i\n", out->sector, ret); - /* Grr... Now we know how long the descriptor they sent was, we + /* + * Grr... Now we know how long the descriptor they sent was, we * make sure they didn't try to write over the end of the block - * file (possibly extending it). */ + * file (possibly extending it). + */ if (ret > 0 && off + ret > vblk->len) { /* Trim it back to the correct length */ ftruncate64(vblk->fd, vblk->len); @@ -1456,10 +1666,12 @@ static void blk_request(struct virtqueue *vq) wlen = sizeof(*in); *in = (ret >= 0 ? VIRTIO_BLK_S_OK : VIRTIO_BLK_S_IOERR); } else { - /* Read */ - - /* Move to the right location in the block file. This can fail - * if they try to read past end. */ + /* + * Read + * + * Move to the right location in the block file. This can fail + * if they try to read past end. + */ if (lseek64(vblk->fd, off, SEEK_SET) != off) err(1, "Bad seek to sector %llu", out->sector); @@ -1474,13 +1686,16 @@ static void blk_request(struct virtqueue *vq) } } - /* OK, so we noted that it was pretty poor to use an fdatasync as a + /* + * OK, so we noted that it was pretty poor to use an fdatasync as a * barrier. But Christoph Hellwig points out that we need a sync * *afterwards* as well: "Barriers specify no reordering to the front - * or the back." And Jens Axboe confirmed it, so here we are: */ + * or the back." And Jens Axboe confirmed it, so here we are: + */ if (out->type & VIRTIO_BLK_T_BARRIER) fdatasync(vblk->fd); + /* Finished that request. */ add_used(vq, head, wlen); } @@ -1491,7 +1706,7 @@ static void setup_block_file(const char *filename) struct vblk_info *vblk; struct virtio_blk_config conf; - /* The device responds to return from I/O thread. */ + /* Creat the device. */ dev = new_device("block", VIRTIO_ID_BLOCK); /* The device has one virtqueue, where the Guest places requests. */ @@ -1510,27 +1725,32 @@ static void setup_block_file(const char *filename) /* Tell Guest how many sectors this device has. */ conf.capacity = cpu_to_le64(vblk->len / 512); - /* Tell Guest not to put in too many descriptors at once: two are used - * for the in and out elements. */ + /* + * Tell Guest not to put in too many descriptors at once: two are used + * for the in and out elements. + */ add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_BLK_F_SEG_MAX); conf.seg_max = cpu_to_le32(VIRTQUEUE_NUM - 2); - set_config(dev, sizeof(conf), &conf); + /* Don't try to put whole struct: we have 8 bit limit. */ + set_config(dev, offsetof(struct virtio_blk_config, geometry), &conf); verbose("device %u: virtblock %llu sectors\n", ++devices.device_num, le64_to_cpu(conf.capacity)); } -struct rng_info { - int rfd; -}; - -/* Our random number generator device reads from /dev/random into the Guest's +/*L:211 + * Our random number generator device reads from /dev/random into the Guest's * input buffers. The usual case is that the Guest doesn't want random numbers * and so has no buffers although /dev/random is still readable, whereas * console is the reverse. * - * The same logic applies, however. */ + * The same logic applies, however. + */ +struct rng_info { + int rfd; +}; + static void rng_input(struct virtqueue *vq) { int len; @@ -1543,9 +1763,10 @@ static void rng_input(struct virtqueue *vq) if (out_num) errx(1, "Output buffers in rng?"); - /* This is why we convert to iovecs: the readv() call uses them, and so - * it reads straight into the Guest's buffer. We loop to make sure we - * fill it. */ + /* + * Just like the console write, we loop to cover the whole iovec. + * In this case, short reads actually happen quite a bit. + */ while (!iov_empty(iov, in_num)) { len = readv(rng_info->rfd, iov, in_num); if (len <= 0) @@ -1558,15 +1779,18 @@ static void rng_input(struct virtqueue *vq) add_used(vq, head, totlen); } -/* And this creates a "hardware" random number device for the Guest. */ +/*L:199 + * This creates a "hardware" random number device for the Guest. + */ static void setup_rng(void) { struct device *dev; struct rng_info *rng_info = malloc(sizeof(*rng_info)); + /* Our device's privat info simply contains the /dev/random fd. */ rng_info->rfd = open_or_die("/dev/random", O_RDONLY); - /* The device responds to return from I/O thread. */ + /* Create the new device. */ dev = new_device("rng", VIRTIO_ID_RNG); dev->priv = rng_info; @@ -1582,8 +1806,10 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) restart_guest(void) { unsigned int i; - /* Since we don't track all open fds, we simply close everything beyond - * stderr. */ + /* + * Since we don't track all open fds, we simply close everything beyond + * stderr. + */ for (i = 3; i < FD_SETSIZE; i++) close(i); @@ -1594,8 +1820,10 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) restart_guest(void) err(1, "Could not exec %s", main_args[0]); } -/*L:220 Finally we reach the core of the Launcher which runs the Guest, serves - * its input and output, and finally, lays it to rest. */ +/*L:220 + * Finally we reach the core of the Launcher which runs the Guest, serves + * its input and output, and finally, lays it to rest. + */ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) run_guest(void) { for (;;) { @@ -1630,7 +1858,7 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) run_guest(void) * * Are you ready? Take a deep breath and join me in the core of the Host, in * "make Host". - :*/ +:*/ static struct option opts[] = { { "verbose", 0, NULL, 'v' }, @@ -1651,8 +1879,7 @@ static void usage(void) /*L:105 The main routine is where the real work begins: */ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { - /* Memory, top-level pagetable, code startpoint and size of the - * (optional) initrd. */ + /* Memory, code startpoint and size of the (optional) initrd. */ unsigned long mem = 0, start, initrd_size = 0; /* Two temporaries. */ int i, c; @@ -1664,24 +1891,32 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* Save the args: we "reboot" by execing ourselves again. */ main_args = argv; - /* First we initialize the device list. We keep a pointer to the last + /* + * First we initialize the device list. We keep a pointer to the last * device, and the next interrupt number to use for devices (1: - * remember that 0 is used by the timer). */ + * remember that 0 is used by the timer). + */ devices.lastdev = NULL; devices.next_irq = 1; + /* We're CPU 0. In fact, that's the only CPU possible right now. */ cpu_id = 0; - /* We need to know how much memory so we can set up the device + + /* + * We need to know how much memory so we can set up the device * descriptor and memory pages for the devices as we parse the command * line. So we quickly look through the arguments to find the amount - * of memory now. */ + * of memory now. + */ for (i = 1; i < argc; i++) { if (argv[i][0] != '-') { mem = atoi(argv[i]) * 1024 * 1024; - /* We start by mapping anonymous pages over all of + /* + * We start by mapping anonymous pages over all of * guest-physical memory range. This fills it with 0, * and ensures that the Guest won't be killed when it - * tries to access it. */ + * tries to access it. + */ guest_base = map_zeroed_pages(mem / getpagesize() + DEVICE_PAGES); guest_limit = mem; @@ -1714,8 +1949,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) usage(); } } - /* After the other arguments we expect memory and kernel image name, - * followed by command line arguments for the kernel. */ + /* + * After the other arguments we expect memory and kernel image name, + * followed by command line arguments for the kernel. + */ if (optind + 2 > argc) usage(); @@ -1733,20 +1970,26 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* Map the initrd image if requested (at top of physical memory) */ if (initrd_name) { initrd_size = load_initrd(initrd_name, mem); - /* These are the location in the Linux boot header where the - * start and size of the initrd are expected to be found. */ + /* + * These are the location in the Linux boot header where the + * start and size of the initrd are expected to be found. + */ boot->hdr.ramdisk_image = mem - initrd_size; boot->hdr.ramdisk_size = initrd_size; /* The bootloader type 0xFF means "unknown"; that's OK. */ boot->hdr.type_of_loader = 0xFF; } - /* The Linux boot header contains an "E820" memory map: ours is a - * simple, single region. */ + /* + * The Linux boot header contains an "E820" memory map: ours is a + * simple, single region. + */ boot->e820_entries = 1; boot->e820_map[0] = ((struct e820entry) { 0, mem, E820_RAM }); - /* The boot header contains a command line pointer: we put the command - * line after the boot header. */ + /* + * The boot header contains a command line pointer: we put the command + * line after the boot header. + */ boot->hdr.cmd_line_ptr = to_guest_phys(boot + 1); /* We use a simple helper to copy the arguments separated by spaces. */ concat((char *)(boot + 1), argv+optind+2); @@ -1760,11 +2003,13 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* Tell the entry path not to try to reload segment registers. */ boot->hdr.loadflags |= KEEP_SEGMENTS; - /* We tell the kernel to initialize the Guest: this returns the open - * /dev/lguest file descriptor. */ + /* + * We tell the kernel to initialize the Guest: this returns the open + * /dev/lguest file descriptor. + */ tell_kernel(start); - /* Ensure that we terminate if a child dies. */ + /* Ensure that we terminate if a device-servicing child dies. */ signal(SIGCHLD, kill_launcher); /* If we exit via err(), this kills all the threads, restores tty. */ diff --git a/Documentation/lockdep-design.txt b/Documentation/lockdep-design.txt index e20d913d591..abf768c681e 100644 --- a/Documentation/lockdep-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/lockdep-design.txt @@ -30,9 +30,9 @@ State The validator tracks lock-class usage history into 4n + 1 separate state bits: - 'ever held in STATE context' -- 'ever head as readlock in STATE context' -- 'ever head with STATE enabled' -- 'ever head as readlock with STATE enabled' +- 'ever held as readlock in STATE context' +- 'ever held with STATE enabled' +- 'ever held as readlock with STATE enabled' Where STATE can be either one of (kernel/lockdep_states.h) - hardirq diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX index 1634c6dceca..50189bf07d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -60,6 +60,8 @@ framerelay.txt - info on using Frame Relay/Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). generic_netlink.txt - info on Generic Netlink +ieee802154.txt + - Linux IEEE 802.15.4 implementation, API and drivers ip-sysctl.txt - /proc/sys/net/ipv4/* variables ip_dynaddr.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt index a0280ad2edc..23c995e6403 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ int sd = socket(PF_IEEE802154, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); ..... The address family, socket addresses etc. are defined in the -include/net/ieee802154/af_ieee802154.h header or in the special header +include/net/af_ieee802154.h header or in the special header in our userspace package (see either linux-zigbee sourceforge download page or git tree at git://linux-zigbee.git.sourceforge.net/gitroot/linux-zigbee). @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ MLME - MAC Level Management ============================ Most of IEEE 802.15.4 MLME interfaces are directly mapped on netlink commands. -See the include/net/ieee802154/nl802154.h header. Our userspace tools package +See the include/net/nl802154.h header. Our userspace tools package (see above) provides CLI configuration utility for radio interfaces and simple coordinator for IEEE 802.15.4 networks as an example users of MLME protocol. @@ -54,10 +54,14 @@ Those types of devices require different approach to be hooked into Linux kernel HardMAC ======= -See the header include/net/ieee802154/netdevice.h. You have to implement Linux +See the header include/net/ieee802154_netdev.h. You have to implement Linux net_device, with .type = ARPHRD_IEEE802154. Data is exchanged with socket family -code via plain sk_buffs. The control block of sk_buffs will contain additional -info as described in the struct ieee802154_mac_cb. +code via plain sk_buffs. On skb reception skb->cb must contain additional +info as described in the struct ieee802154_mac_cb. During packet transmission +the skb->cb is used to provide additional data to device's header_ops->create +function. Be aware, that this data can be overriden later (when socket code +submits skb to qdisc), so if you need something from that cb later, you should +store info in the skb->data on your own. To hook the MLME interface you have to populate the ml_priv field of your net_device with a pointer to struct ieee802154_mlme_ops instance. All fields are @@ -69,8 +73,8 @@ We provide an example of simple HardMAC driver at drivers/ieee802154/fakehard.c SoftMAC ======= -We are going to provide intermediate layer impelementing IEEE 802.15.4 MAC +We are going to provide intermediate layer implementing IEEE 802.15.4 MAC in software. This is currently WIP. -See header include/net/ieee802154/mac802154.h and several drivers in -drivers/ieee802154/ +See header include/net/mac802154.h and several drivers in drivers/ieee802154/. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index 8be76235fe6..fbe427a6580 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -311,9 +311,12 @@ tcp_no_metrics_save - BOOLEAN connections. tcp_orphan_retries - INTEGER - How may times to retry before killing TCP connection, closed - by our side. Default value 7 corresponds to ~50sec-16min - depending on RTO. If you machine is loaded WEB server, + This value influences the timeout of a locally closed TCP connection, + when RTO retransmissions remain unacknowledged. + See tcp_retries2 for more details. + + The default value is 7. + If your machine is a loaded WEB server, you should think about lowering this value, such sockets may consume significant resources. Cf. tcp_max_orphans. @@ -327,16 +330,28 @@ tcp_retrans_collapse - BOOLEAN certain TCP stacks. tcp_retries1 - INTEGER - How many times to retry before deciding that something is wrong - and it is necessary to report this suspicion to network layer. - Minimal RFC value is 3, it is default, which corresponds - to ~3sec-8min depending on RTO. + This value influences the time, after which TCP decides, that + something is wrong due to unacknowledged RTO retransmissions, + and reports this suspicion to the network layer. + See tcp_retries2 for more details. + + RFC 1122 recommends at least 3 retransmissions, which is the + default. tcp_retries2 - INTEGER - How may times to retry before killing alive TCP connection. - RFC1122 says that the limit should be longer than 100 sec. - It is too small number. Default value 15 corresponds to ~13-30min - depending on RTO. + This value influences the timeout of an alive TCP connection, + when RTO retransmissions remain unacknowledged. + Given a value of N, a hypothetical TCP connection following + exponential backoff with an initial RTO of TCP_RTO_MIN would + retransmit N times before killing the connection at the (N+1)th RTO. + + The default value of 15 yields a hypothetical timeout of 924.6 + seconds and is a lower bound for the effective timeout. + TCP will effectively time out at the first RTO which exceeds the + hypothetical timeout. + + RFC 1122 recommends at least 100 seconds for the timeout, + which corresponds to a value of at least 8. tcp_rfc1337 - BOOLEAN If set, the TCP stack behaves conforming to RFC1337. If unset, @@ -1282,6 +1297,16 @@ sctp_rmem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, default, max sctp_wmem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, default, max See tcp_wmem for a description. +addr_scope_policy - INTEGER + Control IPv4 address scoping - draft-stewart-tsvwg-sctp-ipv4-00 + + 0 - Disable IPv4 address scoping + 1 - Enable IPv4 address scoping + 2 - Follow draft but allow IPv4 private addresses + 3 - Follow draft but allow IPv4 link local addresses + + Default: 1 + /proc/sys/net/core/* dev_weight - INTEGER diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f49a33b704d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,378 @@ +Run-time Power Management Framework for I/O Devices + +(C) 2009 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. + +1. Introduction + +Support for run-time power management (run-time PM) of I/O devices is provided +at the power management core (PM core) level by means of: + +* The power management workqueue pm_wq in which bus types and device drivers can + put their PM-related work items. It is strongly recommended that pm_wq be + used for queuing all work items related to run-time PM, because this allows + them to be synchronized with system-wide power transitions (suspend to RAM, + hibernation and resume from system sleep states). pm_wq is declared in + include/linux/pm_runtime.h and defined in kernel/power/main.c. + +* A number of run-time PM fields in the 'power' member of 'struct device' (which + is of the type 'struct dev_pm_info', defined in include/linux/pm.h) that can + be used for synchronizing run-time PM operations with one another. + +* Three device run-time PM callbacks in 'struct dev_pm_ops' (defined in + include/linux/pm.h). + +* A set of helper functions defined in drivers/base/power/runtime.c that can be + used for carrying out run-time PM operations in such a way that the + synchronization between them is taken care of by the PM core. Bus types and + device drivers are encouraged to use these functions. + +The run-time PM callbacks present in 'struct dev_pm_ops', the device run-time PM +fields of 'struct dev_pm_info' and the core helper functions provided for +run-time PM are described below. + +2. Device Run-time PM Callbacks + +There are three device run-time PM callbacks defined in 'struct dev_pm_ops': + +struct dev_pm_ops { + ... + int (*runtime_suspend)(struct device *dev); + int (*runtime_resume)(struct device *dev); + void (*runtime_idle)(struct device *dev); + ... +}; + +The ->runtime_suspend() callback is executed by the PM core for the bus type of +the device being suspended. The bus type's callback is then _entirely_ +_responsible_ for handling the device as appropriate, which may, but need not +include executing the device driver's own ->runtime_suspend() callback (from the +PM core's point of view it is not necessary to implement a ->runtime_suspend() +callback in a device driver as long as the bus type's ->runtime_suspend() knows +what to do to handle the device). + + * Once the bus type's ->runtime_suspend() callback has completed successfully + for given device, the PM core regards the device as suspended, which need + not mean that the device has been put into a low power state. It is + supposed to mean, however, that the device will not process data and will + not communicate with the CPU(s) and RAM until its bus type's + ->runtime_resume() callback is executed for it. The run-time PM status of + a device after successful execution of its bus type's ->runtime_suspend() + callback is 'suspended'. + + * If the bus type's ->runtime_suspend() callback returns -EBUSY or -EAGAIN, + the device's run-time PM status is supposed to be 'active', which means that + the device _must_ be fully operational afterwards. + + * If the bus type's ->runtime_suspend() callback returns an error code + different from -EBUSY or -EAGAIN, the PM core regards this as a fatal + error and will refuse to run the helper functions described in Section 4 + for the device, until the status of it is directly set either to 'active' + or to 'suspended' (the PM core provides special helper functions for this + purpose). + +In particular, if the driver requires remote wakeup capability for proper +functioning and device_may_wakeup() returns 'false' for the device, then +->runtime_suspend() should return -EBUSY. On the other hand, if +device_may_wakeup() returns 'true' for the device and the device is put +into a low power state during the execution of its bus type's +->runtime_suspend(), it is expected that remote wake-up (i.e. hardware mechanism +allowing the device to request a change of its power state, such as PCI PME) +will be enabled for the device. Generally, remote wake-up should be enabled +for all input devices put into a low power state at run time. + +The ->runtime_resume() callback is executed by the PM core for the bus type of +the device being woken up. The bus type's callback is then _entirely_ +_responsible_ for handling the device as appropriate, which may, but need not +include executing the device driver's own ->runtime_resume() callback (from the +PM core's point of view it is not necessary to implement a ->runtime_resume() +callback in a device driver as long as the bus type's ->runtime_resume() knows +what to do to handle the device). + + * Once the bus type's ->runtime_resume() callback has completed successfully, + the PM core regards the device as fully operational, which means that the + device _must_ be able to complete I/O operations as needed. The run-time + PM status of the device is then 'active'. + + * If the bus type's ->runtime_resume() callback returns an error code, the PM + core regards this as a fatal error and will refuse to run the helper + functions described in Section 4 for the device, until its status is + directly set either to 'active' or to 'suspended' (the PM core provides + special helper functions for this purpose). + +The ->runtime_idle() callback is executed by the PM core for the bus type of +given device whenever the device appears to be idle, which is indicated to the +PM core by two counters, the device's usage counter and the counter of 'active' +children of the device. + + * If any of these counters is decreased using a helper function provided by + the PM core and it turns out to be equal to zero, the other counter is + checked. If that counter also is equal to zero, the PM core executes the + device bus type's ->runtime_idle() callback (with the device as an + argument). + +The action performed by a bus type's ->runtime_idle() callback is totally +dependent on the bus type in question, but the expected and recommended action +is to check if the device can be suspended (i.e. if all of the conditions +necessary for suspending the device are satisfied) and to queue up a suspend +request for the device in that case. + +The helper functions provided by the PM core, described in Section 4, guarantee +that the following constraints are met with respect to the bus type's run-time +PM callbacks: + +(1) The callbacks are mutually exclusive (e.g. it is forbidden to execute + ->runtime_suspend() in parallel with ->runtime_resume() or with another + instance of ->runtime_suspend() for the same device) with the exception that + ->runtime_suspend() or ->runtime_resume() can be executed in parallel with + ->runtime_idle() (although ->runtime_idle() will not be started while any + of the other callbacks is being executed for the same device). + +(2) ->runtime_idle() and ->runtime_suspend() can only be executed for 'active' + devices (i.e. the PM core will only execute ->runtime_idle() or + ->runtime_suspend() for the devices the run-time PM status of which is + 'active'). + +(3) ->runtime_idle() and ->runtime_suspend() can only be executed for a device + the usage counter of which is equal to zero _and_ either the counter of + 'active' children of which is equal to zero, or the 'power.ignore_children' + flag of which is set. + +(4) ->runtime_resume() can only be executed for 'suspended' devices (i.e. the + PM core will only execute ->runtime_resume() for the devices the run-time + PM status of which is 'suspended'). + +Additionally, the helper functions provided by the PM core obey the following +rules: + + * If ->runtime_suspend() is about to be executed or there's a pending request + to execute it, ->runtime_idle() will not be executed for the same device. + + * A request to execute or to schedule the execution of ->runtime_suspend() + will cancel any pending requests to execute ->runtime_idle() for the same + device. + + * If ->runtime_resume() is about to be executed or there's a pending request + to execute it, the other callbacks will not be executed for the same device. + + * A request to execute ->runtime_resume() will cancel any pending or + scheduled requests to execute the other callbacks for the same device. + +3. Run-time PM Device Fields + +The following device run-time PM fields are present in 'struct dev_pm_info', as +defined in include/linux/pm.h: + + struct timer_list suspend_timer; + - timer used for scheduling (delayed) suspend request + + unsigned long timer_expires; + - timer expiration time, in jiffies (if this is different from zero, the + timer is running and will expire at that time, otherwise the timer is not + running) + + struct work_struct work; + - work structure used for queuing up requests (i.e. work items in pm_wq) + + wait_queue_head_t wait_queue; + - wait queue used if any of the helper functions needs to wait for another + one to complete + + spinlock_t lock; + - lock used for synchronisation + + atomic_t usage_count; + - the usage counter of the device + + atomic_t child_count; + - the count of 'active' children of the device + + unsigned int ignore_children; + - if set, the value of child_count is ignored (but still updated) + + unsigned int disable_depth; + - used for disabling the helper funcions (they work normally if this is + equal to zero); the initial value of it is 1 (i.e. run-time PM is + initially disabled for all devices) + + unsigned int runtime_error; + - if set, there was a fatal error (one of the callbacks returned error code + as described in Section 2), so the helper funtions will not work until + this flag is cleared; this is the error code returned by the failing + callback + + unsigned int idle_notification; + - if set, ->runtime_idle() is being executed + + unsigned int request_pending; + - if set, there's a pending request (i.e. a work item queued up into pm_wq) + + enum rpm_request request; + - type of request that's pending (valid if request_pending is set) + + unsigned int deferred_resume; + - set if ->runtime_resume() is about to be run while ->runtime_suspend() is + being executed for that device and it is not practical to wait for the + suspend to complete; means "start a resume as soon as you've suspended" + + enum rpm_status runtime_status; + - the run-time PM status of the device; this field's initial value is + RPM_SUSPENDED, which means that each device is initially regarded by the + PM core as 'suspended', regardless of its real hardware status + +All of the above fields are members of the 'power' member of 'struct device'. + +4. Run-time PM Device Helper Functions + +The following run-time PM helper functions are defined in +drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: + + void pm_runtime_init(struct device *dev); + - initialize the device run-time PM fields in 'struct dev_pm_info' + + void pm_runtime_remove(struct device *dev); + - make sure that the run-time PM of the device will be disabled after + removing the device from device hierarchy + + int pm_runtime_idle(struct device *dev); + - execute ->runtime_idle() for the device's bus type; returns 0 on success + or error code on failure, where -EINPROGRESS means that ->runtime_idle() + is already being executed + + int pm_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev); + - execute ->runtime_suspend() for the device's bus type; returns 0 on + success, 1 if the device's run-time PM status was already 'suspended', or + error code on failure, where -EAGAIN or -EBUSY means it is safe to attempt + to suspend the device again in future + + int pm_runtime_resume(struct device *dev); + - execute ->runtime_resume() for the device's bus type; returns 0 on + success, 1 if the device's run-time PM status was already 'active' or + error code on failure, where -EAGAIN means it may be safe to attempt to + resume the device again in future, but 'power.runtime_error' should be + checked additionally + + int pm_request_idle(struct device *dev); + - submit a request to execute ->runtime_idle() for the device's bus type + (the request is represented by a work item in pm_wq); returns 0 on success + or error code if the request has not been queued up + + int pm_schedule_suspend(struct device *dev, unsigned int delay); + - schedule the execution of ->runtime_suspend() for the device's bus type + in future, where 'delay' is the time to wait before queuing up a suspend + work item in pm_wq, in milliseconds (if 'delay' is zero, the work item is + queued up immediately); returns 0 on success, 1 if the device's PM + run-time status was already 'suspended', or error code if the request + hasn't been scheduled (or queued up if 'delay' is 0); if the execution of + ->runtime_suspend() is already scheduled and not yet expired, the new + value of 'delay' will be used as the time to wait + + int pm_request_resume(struct device *dev); + - submit a request to execute ->runtime_resume() for the device's bus type + (the request is represented by a work item in pm_wq); returns 0 on + success, 1 if the device's run-time PM status was already 'active', or + error code if the request hasn't been queued up + + void pm_runtime_get_noresume(struct device *dev); + - increment the device's usage counter + + int pm_runtime_get(struct device *dev); + - increment the device's usage counter, run pm_request_resume(dev) and + return its result + + int pm_runtime_get_sync(struct device *dev); + - increment the device's usage counter, run pm_runtime_resume(dev) and + return its result + + void pm_runtime_put_noidle(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter + + int pm_runtime_put(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter, run pm_request_idle(dev) and return + its result + + int pm_runtime_put_sync(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter, run pm_runtime_idle(dev) and return + its result + + void pm_runtime_enable(struct device *dev); + - enable the run-time PM helper functions to run the device bus type's + run-time PM callbacks described in Section 2 + + int pm_runtime_disable(struct device *dev); + - prevent the run-time PM helper functions from running the device bus + type's run-time PM callbacks, make sure that all of the pending run-time + PM operations on the device are either completed or canceled; returns + 1 if there was a resume request pending and it was necessary to execute + ->runtime_resume() for the device's bus type to satisfy that request, + otherwise 0 is returned + + void pm_suspend_ignore_children(struct device *dev, bool enable); + - set/unset the power.ignore_children flag of the device + + int pm_runtime_set_active(struct device *dev); + - clear the device's 'power.runtime_error' flag, set the device's run-time + PM status to 'active' and update its parent's counter of 'active' + children as appropriate (it is only valid to use this function if + 'power.runtime_error' is set or 'power.disable_depth' is greater than + zero); it will fail and return error code if the device has a parent + which is not active and the 'power.ignore_children' flag of which is unset + + void pm_runtime_set_suspended(struct device *dev); + - clear the device's 'power.runtime_error' flag, set the device's run-time + PM status to 'suspended' and update its parent's counter of 'active' + children as appropriate (it is only valid to use this function if + 'power.runtime_error' is set or 'power.disable_depth' is greater than + zero) + +It is safe to execute the following helper functions from interrupt context: + +pm_request_idle() +pm_schedule_suspend() +pm_request_resume() +pm_runtime_get_noresume() +pm_runtime_get() +pm_runtime_put_noidle() +pm_runtime_put() +pm_suspend_ignore_children() +pm_runtime_set_active() +pm_runtime_set_suspended() +pm_runtime_enable() + +5. Run-time PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal + +Initially, the run-time PM is disabled for all devices, which means that the +majority of the run-time PM helper funtions described in Section 4 will return +-EAGAIN until pm_runtime_enable() is called for the device. + +In addition to that, the initial run-time PM status of all devices is +'suspended', but it need not reflect the actual physical state of the device. +Thus, if the device is initially active (i.e. it is able to process I/O), its +run-time PM status must be changed to 'active', with the help of +pm_runtime_set_active(), before pm_runtime_enable() is called for the device. + +However, if the device has a parent and the parent's run-time PM is enabled, +calling pm_runtime_set_active() for the device will affect the parent, unless +the parent's 'power.ignore_children' flag is set. Namely, in that case the +parent won't be able to suspend at run time, using the PM core's helper +functions, as long as the child's status is 'active', even if the child's +run-time PM is still disabled (i.e. pm_runtime_enable() hasn't been called for +the child yet or pm_runtime_disable() has been called for it). For this reason, +once pm_runtime_set_active() has been called for the device, pm_runtime_enable() +should be called for it too as soon as reasonably possible or its run-time PM +status should be changed back to 'suspended' with the help of +pm_runtime_set_suspended(). + +If the default initial run-time PM status of the device (i.e. 'suspended') +reflects the actual state of the device, its bus type's or its driver's +->probe() callback will likely need to wake it up using one of the PM core's +helper functions described in Section 4. In that case, pm_runtime_resume() +should be used. Of course, for this purpose the device's run-time PM has to be +enabled earlier by calling pm_runtime_enable(). + +If the device bus type's or driver's ->probe() or ->remove() callback runs +pm_runtime_suspend() or pm_runtime_idle() or their asynchronous counterparts, +they will fail returning -EAGAIN, because the device's usage counter is +incremented by the core before executing ->probe() and ->remove(). Still, it +may be desirable to suspend the device as soon as ->probe() or ->remove() has +finished, so the PM core uses pm_runtime_idle_sync() to invoke the device bus +type's ->runtime_idle() callback at that time. diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt index 2d10053dd97..ae66f9b90a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt @@ -495,6 +495,13 @@ and for each vararg a long value. So e.g. for a debug entry with a format string plus two varargs one would need to allocate a (3 * sizeof(long)) byte data area in the debug_register() function. +IMPORTANT: Using "%s" in sprintf event functions is dangerous. You can only +use "%s" in the sprintf event functions, if the memory for the passed string is +available as long as the debug feature exists. The reason behind this is that +due to performance considerations only a pointer to the string is stored in +the debug feature. If you log a string that is freed afterwards, you will get +an OOPS when inspecting the debug feature, because then the debug feature will +access the already freed memory. NOTE: If using the sprintf view do NOT use other event/exception functions than the sprintf-event and -exception functions. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 4252697a95d..1c8eb4518ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -60,6 +60,12 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. slots - Reserve the slot index for the given driver. This option takes multiple strings. See "Module Autoloading Support" section for details. + debug - Specifies the debug message level + (0 = disable debug prints, 1 = normal debug messages, + 2 = verbose debug messages) + This option appears only when CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y. + This option can be dynamically changed via sysfs + /sys/modules/snd/parameters/debug file. Module snd-pcm-oss ------------------ @@ -513,6 +519,26 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. or input, but you may use this module for any application which requires a sound card (like RealPlayer). + pcm_devs - Number of PCM devices assigned to each card + (default = 1, up to 4) + pcm_substreams - Number of PCM substreams assigned to each PCM + (default = 8, up to 16) + hrtimer - Use hrtimer (=1, default) or system timer (=0) + fake_buffer - Fake buffer allocations (default = 1) + + When multiple PCM devices are created, snd-dummy gives different + behavior to each PCM device: + 0 = interleaved with mmap support + 1 = non-interleaved with mmap support + 2 = interleaved without mmap + 3 = non-interleaved without mmap + + As default, snd-dummy drivers doesn't allocate the real buffers + but either ignores read/write or mmap a single dummy page to all + buffer pages, in order to save the resouces. If your apps need + the read/ written buffer data to be consistent, pass fake_buffer=0 + option. + The power-management is supported. Module snd-echo3g @@ -768,6 +794,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. bdl_pos_adj - Specifies the DMA IRQ timing delay in samples. Passing -1 will make the driver to choose the appropriate value based on the controller chip. + patch - Specifies the early "patch" files to modify the HD-audio + setup before initializing the codecs. This option is + available only when CONFIG_SND_HDA_PATCH_LOADER=y is set. + See HD-Audio.txt for details. [Single (global) options] single_cmd - Use single immediate commands to communicate with diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 939a3dd5814..97eebd63bed 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ ALC662/663/272 samsung-nc10 Samsung NC10 mini notebook auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) -ALC882/885 -========== +ALC882/883/885/888/889 +====================== 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O 6stack-dig 6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O arima Arima W820Di1 @@ -127,12 +127,8 @@ ALC882/885 mbp3 Macbook Pro rev3 imac24 iMac 24'' with jack detection w2jc ASUS W2JC - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - -ALC883/888 -========== - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O - 6stack-dig 6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O + 3stack-2ch-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O (ALC883) + alc883-6stack-dig 6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O (ALC883) 3stack-6ch 3-jack 6-channel 3stack-6ch-dig 3-jack 6-channel with SPDIF I/O 6stack-dig-demo 6-jack digital for Intel demo board @@ -140,6 +136,7 @@ ALC883/888 acer-aspire Acer Aspire 9810 acer-aspire-4930g Acer Aspire 4930G acer-aspire-6530g Acer Aspire 6530G + acer-aspire-7730g Acer Aspire 7730G acer-aspire-8930g Acer Aspire 8930G medion Medion Laptops medion-md2 Medion MD2 @@ -155,10 +152,13 @@ ALC883/888 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards) 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530) mitac Mitac 8252D + clevo-m540r Clevo M540R (6ch + digital) clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 fujitsu-xa3530 Fujitsu AMILO XA3530 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards + intel-alc889a Intel IbexPeak with ALC889A + intel-x58 Intel DX58 with ALC889 asus-p5q ASUS P5Q-EM boards mb31 MacBook 3,1 sony-vaio-tt Sony VAIO TT @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ AD1984 ====== basic default configuration thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad T61/X61 - dell Dell T3400 + dell_desktop Dell T3400 AD1986A ======= @@ -258,6 +258,7 @@ Conexant 5045 laptop-micsense Laptop with Mic sense (old model fujitsu) laptop-hpmicsense Laptop with HP and Mic senses benq Benq R55E + laptop-hp530 HP 530 laptop test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can be adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y @@ -278,9 +279,16 @@ Conexant 5051 hp-dv6736 HP dv6736 lenovo-x200 Lenovo X200 laptop +Conexant 5066 +============= + laptop Basic Laptop config (default) + dell-laptop Dell laptops + olpc-xo-1_5 OLPC XO 1.5 + STAC9200 ======== ref Reference board + oqo OQO Model 2 dell-d21 Dell (unknown) dell-d22 Dell (unknown) dell-d23 Dell (unknown) @@ -368,10 +376,12 @@ STAC92HD73* =========== ref Reference board no-jd BIOS setup but without jack-detection + intel Intel DG45* mobos dell-m6-amic Dell desktops/laptops with analog mics dell-m6-dmic Dell desktops/laptops with digital mics dell-m6 Dell desktops/laptops with both type of mics dell-eq Dell desktops/laptops + alienware Alienware M17x auto BIOS setup (default) STAC92HD83* @@ -385,3 +395,8 @@ STAC9872 ======== vaio VAIO laptop without SPDIF auto BIOS setup (default) + +Cirrus Logic CS4206/4207 +======================== + mbp55 MacBook Pro 5,5 + auto BIOS setup (default) diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index 71ac995b191..7b8a5f947d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -139,6 +139,10 @@ The driver checks PCI SSID and looks through the static configuration table until any matching entry is found. If you have a new machine, you may see a message like below: ------------------------------------------------------------------------ + hda_codec: ALC880: BIOS auto-probing. +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Meanwhile, in the earlier versions, you would see a message like: +------------------------------------------------------------------------ hda_codec: Unknown model for ALC880, trying auto-probe from BIOS... ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Even if you see such a message, DON'T PANIC. Take a deep breath and @@ -403,6 +407,66 @@ re-configure based on that state, run like below: ------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Early Patching +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +When CONFIG_SND_HDA_PATCH_LOADER=y is set, you can pass a "patch" as a +firmware file for modifying the HD-audio setup before initializing the +codec. This can work basically like the reconfiguration via sysfs in +the above, but it does it before the first codec configuration. + +A patch file is a plain text file which looks like below: + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + [codec] + 0x12345678 0xabcd1234 2 + + [model] + auto + + [pincfg] + 0x12 0x411111f0 + + [verb] + 0x20 0x500 0x03 + 0x20 0x400 0xff + + [hint] + hp_detect = yes +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +The file needs to have a line `[codec]`. The next line should contain +three numbers indicating the codec vendor-id (0x12345678 in the +example), the codec subsystem-id (0xabcd1234) and the address (2) of +the codec. The rest patch entries are applied to this specified codec +until another codec entry is given. + +The `[model]` line allows to change the model name of the each codec. +In the example above, it will be changed to model=auto. +Note that this overrides the module option. + +After the `[pincfg]` line, the contents are parsed as the initial +default pin-configurations just like `user_pin_configs` sysfs above. +The values can be shown in user_pin_configs sysfs file, too. + +Similarly, the lines after `[verb]` are parsed as `init_verbs` +sysfs entries, and the lines after `[hint]` are parsed as `hints` +sysfs entries, respectively. + +The hd-audio driver reads the file via request_firmware(). Thus, +a patch file has to be located on the appropriate firmware path, +typically, /lib/firmware. For example, when you pass the option +`patch=hda-init.fw`, the file /lib/firmware/hda-init-fw must be +present. + +The patch module option is specific to each card instance, and you +need to give one file name for each instance, separated by commas. +For example, if you have two cards, one for an on-board analog and one +for an HDMI video board, you may pass patch option like below: +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + options snd-hda-intel patch=on-board-patch,hdmi-patch +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Power-Saving ~~~~~~~~~~~~ The power-saving is a kind of auto-suspend of the device. When the diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt index 381908d8ca4..719a819f8cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt @@ -101,6 +101,8 @@ card*/pcm*/xrun_debug bit 0 = Enable XRUN/jiffies debug messages bit 1 = Show stack trace at XRUN / jiffies check bit 2 = Enable additional jiffies check + bit 3 = Log hwptr update at each period interrupt + bit 4 = Log hwptr update at each snd_pcm_update_hw_ptr() When the bit 0 is set, the driver will show the messages to kernel log when an xrun is detected. The debug message is @@ -117,6 +119,9 @@ card*/pcm*/xrun_debug buggy) hardware that doesn't give smooth pointer updates. This feature is enabled via the bit 2. + Bits 3 and 4 are for logging the hwptr records. Note that + these will give flood of kernel messages. + card*/pcm*/sub*/info The general information of this PCM sub-stream. diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 322a00bb99d..2dbff53369d 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ Currently, these files might (depending on your configuration) show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - acpi_video_flags - acct +- callhome [ S390 only ] - auto_msgmni - core_pattern - core_uses_pid @@ -91,6 +92,21 @@ valid for 30 seconds. ============================================================== +callhome: + +Controls the kernel's callhome behavior in case of a kernel panic. + +The s390 hardware allows an operating system to send a notification +to a service organization (callhome) in case of an operating system panic. + +When the value in this file is 0 (which is the default behavior) +nothing happens in case of a kernel panic. If this value is set to "1" +the complete kernel oops message is send to the IBM customer service +organization in case the mainframe the Linux operating system is running +on has a service contract with IBM. + +============================================================== + core_pattern: core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name. diff --git a/Documentation/sysrq.txt b/Documentation/sysrq.txt index cf42b820ff9..d56a0177542 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysrq.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysrq.txt @@ -66,7 +66,8 @@ On all - write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger. e.g.: 'b' - Will immediately reboot the system without syncing or unmounting your disks. -'c' - Will perform a kexec reboot in order to take a crashdump. +'c' - Will perform a system crash by a NULL pointer dereference. + A crashdump will be taken if configured. 'd' - Shows all locks that are held. @@ -141,8 +142,8 @@ useful when you want to exit a program that will not let you switch consoles. re'B'oot is good when you're unable to shut down. But you should also 'S'ync and 'U'mount first. -'C'rashdump can be used to manually trigger a crashdump when the system is hung. -The kernel needs to have been built with CONFIG_KEXEC enabled. +'C'rash can be used to manually trigger a crashdump when the system is hung. +Note that this just triggers a crash if there is no dump mechanism available. 'S'ync is great when your system is locked up, it allows you to sync your disks and will certainly lessen the chance of data loss and fscking. Note diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events.txt b/Documentation/trace/events.txt index f157d7594ea..78c45a87be5 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/events.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/events.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Event Tracing Documentation written by Theodore Ts'o - Updated by Li Zefan + Updated by Li Zefan and Tom Zanussi 1. Introduction =============== @@ -22,12 +22,12 @@ tracing information should be printed. --------------------------------- The events which are available for tracing can be found in the file -/debug/tracing/available_events. +/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/available_events. To enable a particular event, such as 'sched_wakeup', simply echo it -to /debug/tracing/set_event. For example: +to /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event. For example: - # echo sched_wakeup >> /debug/tracing/set_event + # echo sched_wakeup >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event [ Note: '>>' is necessary, otherwise it will firstly disable all the events. ] @@ -35,15 +35,15 @@ to /debug/tracing/set_event. For example: To disable an event, echo the event name to the set_event file prefixed with an exclamation point: - # echo '!sched_wakeup' >> /debug/tracing/set_event + # echo '!sched_wakeup' >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event To disable all events, echo an empty line to the set_event file: - # echo > /debug/tracing/set_event + # echo > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event To enable all events, echo '*:*' or '*:' to the set_event file: - # echo *:* > /debug/tracing/set_event + # echo *:* > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event The events are organized into subsystems, such as ext4, irq, sched, etc., and a full event name looks like this: <subsystem>:<event>. The @@ -52,29 +52,29 @@ file. All of the events in a subsystem can be specified via the syntax "<subsystem>:*"; for example, to enable all irq events, you can use the command: - # echo 'irq:*' > /debug/tracing/set_event + # echo 'irq:*' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event 2.2 Via the 'enable' toggle --------------------------- -The events available are also listed in /debug/tracing/events/ hierarchy +The events available are also listed in /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/ hierarchy of directories. To enable event 'sched_wakeup': - # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/enable + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/enable To disable it: - # echo 0 > /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/enable + # echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/enable To enable all events in sched subsystem: - # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/events/sched/enable + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/enable To eanble all events: - # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/events/enable + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/enable When reading one of these enable files, there are four results: @@ -83,8 +83,199 @@ When reading one of these enable files, there are four results: X - there is a mixture of events enabled and disabled ? - this file does not affect any event +2.3 Boot option +--------------- + +In order to facilitate early boot debugging, use boot option: + + trace_event=[event-list] + +The format of this boot option is the same as described in section 2.1. + 3. Defining an event-enabled tracepoint ======================================= See The example provided in samples/trace_events +4. Event formats +================ + +Each trace event has a 'format' file associated with it that contains +a description of each field in a logged event. This information can +be used to parse the binary trace stream, and is also the place to +find the field names that can be used in event filters (see section 5). + +It also displays the format string that will be used to print the +event in text mode, along with the event name and ID used for +profiling. + +Every event has a set of 'common' fields associated with it; these are +the fields prefixed with 'common_'. The other fields vary between +events and correspond to the fields defined in the TRACE_EVENT +definition for that event. + +Each field in the format has the form: + + field:field-type field-name; offset:N; size:N; + +where offset is the offset of the field in the trace record and size +is the size of the data item, in bytes. + +For example, here's the information displayed for the 'sched_wakeup' +event: + +# cat /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/format + +name: sched_wakeup +ID: 60 +format: + field:unsigned short common_type; offset:0; size:2; + field:unsigned char common_flags; offset:2; size:1; + field:unsigned char common_preempt_count; offset:3; size:1; + field:int common_pid; offset:4; size:4; + field:int common_tgid; offset:8; size:4; + + field:char comm[TASK_COMM_LEN]; offset:12; size:16; + field:pid_t pid; offset:28; size:4; + field:int prio; offset:32; size:4; + field:int success; offset:36; size:4; + field:int cpu; offset:40; size:4; + +print fmt: "task %s:%d [%d] success=%d [%03d]", REC->comm, REC->pid, + REC->prio, REC->success, REC->cpu + +This event contains 10 fields, the first 5 common and the remaining 5 +event-specific. All the fields for this event are numeric, except for +'comm' which is a string, a distinction important for event filtering. + +5. Event filtering +================== + +Trace events can be filtered in the kernel by associating boolean +'filter expressions' with them. As soon as an event is logged into +the trace buffer, its fields are checked against the filter expression +associated with that event type. An event with field values that +'match' the filter will appear in the trace output, and an event whose +values don't match will be discarded. An event with no filter +associated with it matches everything, and is the default when no +filter has been set for an event. + +5.1 Expression syntax +--------------------- + +A filter expression consists of one or more 'predicates' that can be +combined using the logical operators '&&' and '||'. A predicate is +simply a clause that compares the value of a field contained within a +logged event with a constant value and returns either 0 or 1 depending +on whether the field value matched (1) or didn't match (0): + + field-name relational-operator value + +Parentheses can be used to provide arbitrary logical groupings and +double-quotes can be used to prevent the shell from interpreting +operators as shell metacharacters. + +The field-names available for use in filters can be found in the +'format' files for trace events (see section 4). + +The relational-operators depend on the type of the field being tested: + +The operators available for numeric fields are: + +==, !=, <, <=, >, >= + +And for string fields they are: + +==, != + +Currently, only exact string matches are supported. + +Currently, the maximum number of predicates in a filter is 16. + +5.2 Setting filters +------------------- + +A filter for an individual event is set by writing a filter expression +to the 'filter' file for the given event. + +For example: + +# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup +# echo "common_preempt_count > 4" > filter + +A slightly more involved example: + +# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_signal_send +# echo "((sig >= 10 && sig < 15) || sig == 17) && comm != bash" > filter + +If there is an error in the expression, you'll get an 'Invalid +argument' error when setting it, and the erroneous string along with +an error message can be seen by looking at the filter e.g.: + +# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_signal_send +# echo "((sig >= 10 && sig < 15) || dsig == 17) && comm != bash" > filter +-bash: echo: write error: Invalid argument +# cat filter +((sig >= 10 && sig < 15) || dsig == 17) && comm != bash +^ +parse_error: Field not found + +Currently the caret ('^') for an error always appears at the beginning of +the filter string; the error message should still be useful though +even without more accurate position info. + +5.3 Clearing filters +-------------------- + +To clear the filter for an event, write a '0' to the event's filter +file. + +To clear the filters for all events in a subsystem, write a '0' to the +subsystem's filter file. + +5.3 Subsystem filters +--------------------- + +For convenience, filters for every event in a subsystem can be set or +cleared as a group by writing a filter expression into the filter file +at the root of the subsytem. Note however, that if a filter for any +event within the subsystem lacks a field specified in the subsystem +filter, or if the filter can't be applied for any other reason, the +filter for that event will retain its previous setting. This can +result in an unintended mixture of filters which could lead to +confusing (to the user who might think different filters are in +effect) trace output. Only filters that reference just the common +fields can be guaranteed to propagate successfully to all events. + +Here are a few subsystem filter examples that also illustrate the +above points: + +Clear the filters on all events in the sched subsytem: + +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched +# echo 0 > filter +# cat sched_switch/filter +none +# cat sched_wakeup/filter +none + +Set a filter using only common fields for all events in the sched +subsytem (all events end up with the same filter): + +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched +# echo common_pid == 0 > filter +# cat sched_switch/filter +common_pid == 0 +# cat sched_wakeup/filter +common_pid == 0 + +Attempt to set a filter using a non-common field for all events in the +sched subsytem (all events but those that have a prev_pid field retain +their old filters): + +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched +# echo prev_pid == 0 > filter +# cat sched_switch/filter +prev_pid == 0 +# cat sched_wakeup/filter +common_pid == 0 diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7003e10f10f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ + function tracer guts + ==================== + +Introduction +------------ + +Here we will cover the architecture pieces that the common function tracing +code relies on for proper functioning. Things are broken down into increasing +complexity so that you can start simple and at least get basic functionality. + +Note that this focuses on architecture implementation details only. If you +want more explanation of a feature in terms of common code, review the common +ftrace.txt file. + + +Prerequisites +------------- + +Ftrace relies on these features being implemented: + STACKTRACE_SUPPORT - implement save_stack_trace() + TRACE_IRQFLAGS_SUPPORT - implement include/asm/irqflags.h + + +HAVE_FUNCTION_TRACER +-------------------- + +You will need to implement the mcount and the ftrace_stub functions. + +The exact mcount symbol name will depend on your toolchain. Some call it +"mcount", "_mcount", or even "__mcount". You can probably figure it out by +running something like: + $ echo 'main(){}' | gcc -x c -S -o - - -pg | grep mcount + call mcount +We'll make the assumption below that the symbol is "mcount" just to keep things +nice and simple in the examples. + +Keep in mind that the ABI that is in effect inside of the mcount function is +*highly* architecture/toolchain specific. We cannot help you in this regard, +sorry. Dig up some old documentation and/or find someone more familiar than +you to bang ideas off of. Typically, register usage (argument/scratch/etc...) +is a major issue at this point, especially in relation to the location of the +mcount call (before/after function prologue). You might also want to look at +how glibc has implemented the mcount function for your architecture. It might +be (semi-)relevant. + +The mcount function should check the function pointer ftrace_trace_function +to see if it is set to ftrace_stub. If it is, there is nothing for you to do, +so return immediately. If it isn't, then call that function in the same way +the mcount function normally calls __mcount_internal -- the first argument is +the "frompc" while the second argument is the "selfpc" (adjusted to remove the +size of the mcount call that is embedded in the function). + +For example, if the function foo() calls bar(), when the bar() function calls +mcount(), the arguments mcount() will pass to the tracer are: + "frompc" - the address bar() will use to return to foo() + "selfpc" - the address bar() (with _mcount() size adjustment) + +Also keep in mind that this mcount function will be called *a lot*, so +optimizing for the default case of no tracer will help the smooth running of +your system when tracing is disabled. So the start of the mcount function is +typically the bare min with checking things before returning. That also means +the code flow should usually kept linear (i.e. no branching in the nop case). +This is of course an optimization and not a hard requirement. + +Here is some pseudo code that should help (these functions should actually be +implemented in assembly): + +void ftrace_stub(void) +{ + return; +} + +void mcount(void) +{ + /* save any bare state needed in order to do initial checking */ + + extern void (*ftrace_trace_function)(unsigned long, unsigned long); + if (ftrace_trace_function != ftrace_stub) + goto do_trace; + + /* restore any bare state */ + + return; + +do_trace: + + /* save all state needed by the ABI (see paragraph above) */ + + unsigned long frompc = ...; + unsigned long selfpc = <return address> - MCOUNT_INSN_SIZE; + ftrace_trace_function(frompc, selfpc); + + /* restore all state needed by the ABI */ +} + +Don't forget to export mcount for modules ! +extern void mcount(void); +EXPORT_SYMBOL(mcount); + + +HAVE_FUNCTION_TRACE_MCOUNT_TEST +------------------------------- + +This is an optional optimization for the normal case when tracing is turned off +in the system. If you do not enable this Kconfig option, the common ftrace +code will take care of doing the checking for you. + +To support this feature, you only need to check the function_trace_stop +variable in the mcount function. If it is non-zero, there is no tracing to be +done at all, so you can return. + +This additional pseudo code would simply be: +void mcount(void) +{ + /* save any bare state needed in order to do initial checking */ + ++ if (function_trace_stop) ++ return; + + extern void (*ftrace_trace_function)(unsigned long, unsigned long); + if (ftrace_trace_function != ftrace_stub) +... + + +HAVE_FUNCTION_GRAPH_TRACER +-------------------------- + +Deep breath ... time to do some real work. Here you will need to update the +mcount function to check ftrace graph function pointers, as well as implement +some functions to save (hijack) and restore the return address. + +The mcount function should check the function pointers ftrace_graph_return +(compare to ftrace_stub) and ftrace_graph_entry (compare to +ftrace_graph_entry_stub). If either of those are not set to the relevant stub +function, call the arch-specific function ftrace_graph_caller which in turn +calls the arch-specific function prepare_ftrace_return. Neither of these +function names are strictly required, but you should use them anyways to stay +consistent across the architecture ports -- easier to compare & contrast +things. + +The arguments to prepare_ftrace_return are slightly different than what are +passed to ftrace_trace_function. The second argument "selfpc" is the same, +but the first argument should be a pointer to the "frompc". Typically this is +located on the stack. This allows the function to hijack the return address +temporarily to have it point to the arch-specific function return_to_handler. +That function will simply call the common ftrace_return_to_handler function and +that will return the original return address with which, you can return to the +original call site. + +Here is the updated mcount pseudo code: +void mcount(void) +{ +... + if (ftrace_trace_function != ftrace_stub) + goto do_trace; + ++#ifdef CONFIG_FUNCTION_GRAPH_TRACER ++ extern void (*ftrace_graph_return)(...); ++ extern void (*ftrace_graph_entry)(...); ++ if (ftrace_graph_return != ftrace_stub || ++ ftrace_graph_entry != ftrace_graph_entry_stub) ++ ftrace_graph_caller(); ++#endif + + /* restore any bare state */ +... + +Here is the pseudo code for the new ftrace_graph_caller assembly function: +#ifdef CONFIG_FUNCTION_GRAPH_TRACER +void ftrace_graph_caller(void) +{ + /* save all state needed by the ABI */ + + unsigned long *frompc = &...; + unsigned long selfpc = <return address> - MCOUNT_INSN_SIZE; + prepare_ftrace_return(frompc, selfpc); + + /* restore all state needed by the ABI */ +} +#endif + +For information on how to implement prepare_ftrace_return(), simply look at +the x86 version. The only architecture-specific piece in it is the setup of +the fault recovery table (the asm(...) code). The rest should be the same +across architectures. + +Here is the pseudo code for the new return_to_handler assembly function. Note +that the ABI that applies here is different from what applies to the mcount +code. Since you are returning from a function (after the epilogue), you might +be able to skimp on things saved/restored (usually just registers used to pass +return values). + +#ifdef CONFIG_FUNCTION_GRAPH_TRACER +void return_to_handler(void) +{ + /* save all state needed by the ABI (see paragraph above) */ + + void (*original_return_point)(void) = ftrace_return_to_handler(); + + /* restore all state needed by the ABI */ + + /* this is usually either a return or a jump */ + original_return_point(); +} +#endif + + +HAVE_FTRACE_NMI_ENTER +--------------------- + +If you can't trace NMI functions, then skip this option. + +<details to be filled> + + +HAVE_FTRACE_SYSCALLS +--------------------- + +<details to be filled> + + +HAVE_FTRACE_MCOUNT_RECORD +------------------------- + +See scripts/recordmcount.pl for more info. + +<details to be filled> + + +HAVE_DYNAMIC_FTRACE +--------------------- + +<details to be filled> diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt index a39b3c749de..1b6292bbdd6 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt @@ -26,6 +26,12 @@ disabled, and more (ftrace allows for tracer plugins, which means that the list of tracers can always grow). +Implementation Details +---------------------- + +See ftrace-design.txt for details for arch porters and such. + + The File System --------------- @@ -85,26 +91,19 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: This file holds the output of the trace in a human readable format (described below). - latency_trace: - - This file shows the same trace but the information - is organized more to display possible latencies - in the system (described below). - trace_pipe: The output is the same as the "trace" file but this file is meant to be streamed with live tracing. - Reads from this file will block until new data - is retrieved. Unlike the "trace" and "latency_trace" - files, this file is a consumer. This means reading - from this file causes sequential reads to display - more current data. Once data is read from this - file, it is consumed, and will not be read - again with a sequential read. The "trace" and - "latency_trace" files are static, and if the - tracer is not adding more data, they will display - the same information every time they are read. + Reads from this file will block until new data is + retrieved. Unlike the "trace" file, this file is a + consumer. This means reading from this file causes + sequential reads to display more current data. Once + data is read from this file, it is consumed, and + will not be read again with a sequential read. The + "trace" file is static, and if the tracer is not + adding more data,they will display the same + information every time they are read. trace_options: @@ -117,10 +116,10 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: Some of the tracers record the max latency. For example, the time interrupts are disabled. This time is saved in this file. The max trace - will also be stored, and displayed by either - "trace" or "latency_trace". A new max trace will - only be recorded if the latency is greater than - the value in this file. (in microseconds) + will also be stored, and displayed by "trace". + A new max trace will only be recorded if the + latency is greater than the value in this + file. (in microseconds) buffer_size_kb: @@ -210,7 +209,7 @@ Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured. the trace with the longest max latency. See tracing_max_latency. When a new max is recorded, it replaces the old trace. It is best to view this - trace via the latency_trace file. + trace with the latency-format option enabled. "preemptoff" @@ -307,8 +306,8 @@ the lowest priority thread (pid 0). Latency trace format -------------------- -For traces that display latency times, the latency_trace file -gives somewhat more information to see why a latency happened. +When the latency-format option is enabled, the trace file gives +somewhat more information to see why a latency happened. Here is a typical trace. # tracer: irqsoff @@ -380,9 +379,10 @@ explains which is which. The above is mostly meaningful for kernel developers. - time: This differs from the trace file output. The trace file output - includes an absolute timestamp. The timestamp used by the - latency_trace file is relative to the start of the trace. + time: When the latency-format option is enabled, the trace file + output includes a timestamp relative to the start of the + trace. This differs from the output when latency-format + is disabled, which includes an absolute timestamp. delay: This is just to help catch your eye a bit better. And needs to be fixed to be only relative to the same CPU. @@ -440,7 +440,8 @@ Here are the available options: sym-addr: bash-4000 [01] 1477.606694: simple_strtoul <c0339346> - verbose - This deals with the latency_trace file. + verbose - This deals with the trace file when the + latency-format option is enabled. bash 4000 1 0 00000000 00010a95 [58127d26] 1720.415ms \ (+0.000ms): simple_strtoul (strict_strtoul) @@ -472,7 +473,7 @@ Here are the available options: the app is no longer running The lookup is performed when you read - trace,trace_pipe,latency_trace. Example: + trace,trace_pipe. Example: a.out-1623 [000] 40874.465068: /root/a.out[+0x480] <-/root/a.out[+0 x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6] @@ -481,6 +482,11 @@ x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6] every scheduling event. Will add overhead if there's a lot of tasks running at once. + latency-format - This option changes the trace. When + it is enabled, the trace displays + additional information about the + latencies, as described in "Latency + trace format". sched_switch ------------ @@ -596,12 +602,13 @@ To reset the maximum, echo 0 into tracing_max_latency. Here is an example: # echo irqsoff > current_tracer + # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency # echo 1 > tracing_enabled # ls -ltr [...] # echo 0 > tracing_enabled - # cat latency_trace + # cat trace # tracer: irqsoff # irqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26 @@ -703,12 +710,13 @@ which preemption was disabled. The control of preemptoff tracer is much like the irqsoff tracer. # echo preemptoff > current_tracer + # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency # echo 1 > tracing_enabled # ls -ltr [...] # echo 0 > tracing_enabled - # cat latency_trace + # cat trace # tracer: preemptoff # preemptoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8 @@ -850,12 +858,13 @@ Again, using this trace is much like the irqsoff and preemptoff tracers. # echo preemptirqsoff > current_tracer + # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency # echo 1 > tracing_enabled # ls -ltr [...] # echo 0 > tracing_enabled - # cat latency_trace + # cat trace # tracer: preemptirqsoff # preemptirqsoff latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8 @@ -1012,11 +1021,12 @@ Instead of performing an 'ls', we will run 'sleep 1' under 'chrt' which changes the priority of the task. # echo wakeup > current_tracer + # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency # echo 1 > tracing_enabled # chrt -f 5 sleep 1 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled - # cat latency_trace + # cat trace # tracer: wakeup # wakeup latency trace v1.1.5 on 2.6.26-rc8 diff --git a/Documentation/trace/function-graph-fold.vim b/Documentation/trace/function-graph-fold.vim new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0544b504c8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/function-graph-fold.vim @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +" Enable folding for ftrace function_graph traces. +" +" To use, :source this file while viewing a function_graph trace, or use vim's +" -S option to load from the command-line together with a trace. You can then +" use the usual vim fold commands, such as "za", to open and close nested +" functions. While closed, a fold will show the total time taken for a call, +" as would normally appear on the line with the closing brace. Folded +" functions will not include finish_task_switch(), so folding should remain +" relatively sane even through a context switch. +" +" Note that this will almost certainly only work well with a +" single-CPU trace (e.g. trace-cmd report --cpu 1). + +function! FunctionGraphFoldExpr(lnum) + let line = getline(a:lnum) + if line[-1:] == '{' + if line =~ 'finish_task_switch() {$' + return '>1' + endif + return 'a1' + elseif line[-1:] == '}' + return 's1' + else + return '=' + endif +endfunction + +function! FunctionGraphFoldText() + let s = split(getline(v:foldstart), '|', 1) + if getline(v:foldend+1) =~ 'finish_task_switch() {$' + let s[2] = ' task switch ' + else + let e = split(getline(v:foldend), '|', 1) + let s[2] = e[2] + endif + return join(s, '|') +endfunction + +setlocal foldexpr=FunctionGraphFoldExpr(v:lnum) +setlocal foldtext=FunctionGraphFoldText() +setlocal foldcolumn=12 +setlocal foldmethod=expr diff --git a/Documentation/trace/power.txt b/Documentation/trace/power.txt deleted file mode 100644 index cd805e16dc2..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/trace/power.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -The power tracer collects detailed information about C-state and P-state -transitions, instead of just looking at the high-level "average" -information. - -There is a helper script found in scrips/tracing/power.pl in the kernel -sources which can be used to parse this information and create a -Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) picture from the trace data. - -To use this tracer: - - echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/tracing_enabled - echo power > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/current_tracer - echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/tracing_enabled - sleep 1 - echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/tracing_enabled - cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace | \ - perl scripts/tracing/power.pl > out.sv diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5b1d23d604c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt @@ -0,0 +1,955 @@ + Lockless Ring Buffer Design + =========================== + +Copyright 2009 Red Hat Inc. + Author: Steven Rostedt <srostedt@redhat.com> + License: The GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 + (dual licensed under the GPL v2) +Reviewers: Mathieu Desnoyers, Huang Ying, Hidetoshi Seto, + and Frederic Weisbecker. + + +Written for: 2.6.31 + +Terminology used in this Document +--------------------------------- + +tail - where new writes happen in the ring buffer. + +head - where new reads happen in the ring buffer. + +producer - the task that writes into the ring buffer (same as writer) + +writer - same as producer + +consumer - the task that reads from the buffer (same as reader) + +reader - same as consumer. + +reader_page - A page outside the ring buffer used solely (for the most part) + by the reader. + +head_page - a pointer to the page that the reader will use next + +tail_page - a pointer to the page that will be written to next + +commit_page - a pointer to the page with the last finished non nested write. + +cmpxchg - hardware assisted atomic transaction that performs the following: + + A = B iff previous A == C + + R = cmpxchg(A, C, B) is saying that we replace A with B if and only if + current A is equal to C, and we put the old (current) A into R + + R gets the previous A regardless if A is updated with B or not. + + To see if the update was successful a compare of R == C may be used. + +The Generic Ring Buffer +----------------------- + +The ring buffer can be used in either an overwrite mode or in +producer/consumer mode. + +Producer/consumer mode is where the producer were to fill up the +buffer before the consumer could free up anything, the producer +will stop writing to the buffer. This will lose most recent events. + +Overwrite mode is where the produce were to fill up the buffer +before the consumer could free up anything, the producer will +overwrite the older data. This will lose the oldest events. + +No two writers can write at the same time (on the same per cpu buffer), +but a writer may interrupt another writer, but it must finish writing +before the previous writer may continue. This is very important to the +algorithm. The writers act like a "stack". The way interrupts works +enforces this behavior. + + + writer1 start + <preempted> writer2 start + <preempted> writer3 start + writer3 finishes + writer2 finishes + writer1 finishes + +This is very much like a writer being preempted by an interrupt and +the interrupt doing a write as well. + +Readers can happen at any time. But no two readers may run at the +same time, nor can a reader preempt/interrupt another reader. A reader +can not preempt/interrupt a writer, but it may read/consume from the +buffer at the same time as a writer is writing, but the reader must be +on another processor to do so. A reader may read on its own processor +and can be preempted by a writer. + +A writer can preempt a reader, but a reader can not preempt a writer. +But a reader can read the buffer at the same time (on another processor) +as a writer. + +The ring buffer is made up of a list of pages held together by a link list. + +At initialization a reader page is allocated for the reader that is not +part of the ring buffer. + +The head_page, tail_page and commit_page are all initialized to point +to the same page. + +The reader page is initialized to have its next pointer pointing to +the head page, and its previous pointer pointing to a page before +the head page. + +The reader has its own page to use. At start up time, this page is +allocated but is not attached to the list. When the reader wants +to read from the buffer, if its page is empty (like it is on start up) +it will swap its page with the head_page. The old reader page will +become part of the ring buffer and the head_page will be removed. +The page after the inserted page (old reader_page) will become the +new head page. + +Once the new page is given to the reader, the reader could do what +it wants with it, as long as a writer has left that page. + +A sample of how the reader page is swapped: Note this does not +show the head page in the buffer, it is for demonstrating a swap +only. + + +------+ + |reader| RING BUFFER + |page | + +------+ + +---+ +---+ +---+ + | |-->| |-->| | + | |<--| |<--| | + +---+ +---+ +---+ + ^ | ^ | + | +-------------+ | + +-----------------+ + + + +------+ + |reader| RING BUFFER + |page |-------------------+ + +------+ v + | +---+ +---+ +---+ + | | |-->| |-->| | + | | |<--| |<--| |<-+ + | +---+ +---+ +---+ | + | ^ | ^ | | + | | +-------------+ | | + | +-----------------+ | + +------------------------------------+ + + +------+ + |reader| RING BUFFER + |page |-------------------+ + +------+ <---------------+ v + | ^ +---+ +---+ +---+ + | | | |-->| |-->| | + | | | | | |<--| |<-+ + | | +---+ +---+ +---+ | + | | | ^ | | + | | +-------------+ | | + | +-----------------------------+ | + +------------------------------------+ + + +------+ + |buffer| RING BUFFER + |page |-------------------+ + +------+ <---------------+ v + | ^ +---+ +---+ +---+ + | | | | | |-->| | + | | New | | | |<--| |<-+ + | | Reader +---+ +---+ +---+ | + | | page ----^ | | + | | | | + | +-----------------------------+ | + +------------------------------------+ + + + +It is possible that the page swapped is the commit page and the tail page, +if what is in the ring buffer is less than what is held in a buffer page. + + + reader page commit page tail page + | | | + v | | + +---+ | | + | |<----------+ | + | |<------------------------+ + | |------+ + +---+ | + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +This case is still valid for this algorithm. +When the writer leaves the page, it simply goes into the ring buffer +since the reader page still points to the next location in the ring +buffer. + + +The main pointers: + + reader page - The page used solely by the reader and is not part + of the ring buffer (may be swapped in) + + head page - the next page in the ring buffer that will be swapped + with the reader page. + + tail page - the page where the next write will take place. + + commit page - the page that last finished a write. + +The commit page only is updated by the outer most writer in the +writer stack. A writer that preempts another writer will not move the +commit page. + +When data is written into the ring buffer, a position is reserved +in the ring buffer and passed back to the writer. When the writer +is finished writing data into that position, it commits the write. + +Another write (or a read) may take place at anytime during this +transaction. If another write happens it must finish before continuing +with the previous write. + + + Write reserve: + + Buffer page + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ <--- given back to writer (current commit) + |reserved | + +---------+ <--- tail pointer + | empty | + +---------+ + + Write commit: + + Buffer page + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ <--- next positon for write (current commit) + | empty | + +---------+ + + + If a write happens after the first reserve: + + Buffer page + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ <-- current commit + |reserved | + +---------+ <--- given back to second writer + |reserved | + +---------+ <--- tail pointer + + After second writer commits: + + + Buffer page + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ <--(last full commit) + |reserved | + +---------+ + |pending | + |commit | + +---------+ <--- tail pointer + + When the first writer commits: + + Buffer page + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ + |written | + +---------+ <--(last full commit and tail pointer) + + +The commit pointer points to the last write location that was +committed without preempting another write. When a write that +preempted another write is committed, it only becomes a pending commit +and will not be a full commit till all writes have been committed. + +The commit page points to the page that has the last full commit. +The tail page points to the page with the last write (before +committing). + +The tail page is always equal to or after the commit page. It may +be several pages ahead. If the tail page catches up to the commit +page then no more writes may take place (regardless of the mode +of the ring buffer: overwrite and produce/consumer). + +The order of pages are: + + head page + commit page + tail page + +Possible scenario: + tail page + head page commit page | + | | | + v v v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +There is a special case that the head page is after either the commit page +and possibly the tail page. That is when the commit (and tail) page has been +swapped with the reader page. This is because the head page is always +part of the ring buffer, but the reader page is not. When ever there +has been less than a full page that has been committed inside the ring buffer, +and a reader swaps out a page, it will be swapping out the commit page. + + + reader page commit page tail page + | | | + v | | + +---+ | | + | |<----------+ | + | |<------------------------+ + | |------+ + +---+ | + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + ^ + | + head page + + +In this case, the head page will not move when the tail and commit +move back into the ring buffer. + +The reader can not swap a page into the ring buffer if the commit page +is still on that page. If the read meets the last commit (real commit +not pending or reserved), then there is nothing more to read. +The buffer is considered empty until another full commit finishes. + +When the tail meets the head page, if the buffer is in overwrite mode, +the head page will be pushed ahead one. If the buffer is in producer/consumer +mode, the write will fail. + +Overwrite mode: + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + ^ + | + head page + + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + ^ + | + head page + + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + ^ + | + head page + +Note, the reader page will still point to the previous head page. +But when a swap takes place, it will use the most recent head page. + + +Making the Ring Buffer Lockless: +-------------------------------- + +The main idea behind the lockless algorithm is to combine the moving +of the head_page pointer with the swapping of pages with the reader. +State flags are placed inside the pointer to the page. To do this, +each page must be aligned in memory by 4 bytes. This will allow the 2 +least significant bits of the address to be used as flags. Since +they will always be zero for the address. To get the address, +simply mask out the flags. + + MASK = ~3 + + address & MASK + +Two flags will be kept by these two bits: + + HEADER - the page being pointed to is a head page + + UPDATE - the page being pointed to is being updated by a writer + and was or is about to be a head page. + + + reader page + | + v + +---+ + | |------+ + +---+ | + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-H->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + + +The above pointer "-H->" would have the HEADER flag set. That is +the next page is the next page to be swapped out by the reader. +This pointer means the next page is the head page. + +When the tail page meets the head pointer, it will use cmpxchg to +change the pointer to the UPDATE state: + + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-H->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +"-U->" represents a pointer in the UPDATE state. + +Any access to the reader will need to take some sort of lock to serialize +the readers. But the writers will never take a lock to write to the +ring buffer. This means we only need to worry about a single reader, +and writes only preempt in "stack" formation. + +When the reader tries to swap the page with the ring buffer, it +will also use cmpxchg. If the flag bit in the pointer to the +head page does not have the HEADER flag set, the compare will fail +and the reader will need to look for the new head page and try again. +Note, the flag UPDATE and HEADER are never set at the same time. + +The reader swaps the reader page as follows: + + +------+ + |reader| RING BUFFER + |page | + +------+ + +---+ +---+ +---+ + | |--->| |--->| | + | |<---| |<---| | + +---+ +---+ +---+ + ^ | ^ | + | +---------------+ | + +-----H-------------+ + +The reader sets the reader page next pointer as HEADER to the page after +the head page. + + + +------+ + |reader| RING BUFFER + |page |-------H-----------+ + +------+ v + | +---+ +---+ +---+ + | | |--->| |--->| | + | | |<---| |<---| |<-+ + | +---+ +---+ +---+ | + | ^ | ^ | | + | | +---------------+ | | + | +-----H-------------+ | + +--------------------------------------+ + +It does a cmpxchg with the pointer to the previous head page to make it +point to the reader page. Note that the new pointer does not have the HEADER +flag set. This action atomically moves the head page forward. + + +------+ + |reader| RING BUFFER + |page |-------H-----------+ + +------+ v + | ^ +---+ +---+ +---+ + | | | |-->| |-->| | + | | | |<--| |<--| |<-+ + | | +---+ +---+ +---+ | + | | | ^ | | + | | +-------------+ | | + | +-----------------------------+ | + +------------------------------------+ + +After the new head page is set, the previous pointer of the head page is +updated to the reader page. + + +------+ + |reader| RING BUFFER + |page |-------H-----------+ + +------+ <---------------+ v + | ^ +---+ +---+ +---+ + | | | |-->| |-->| | + | | | | | |<--| |<-+ + | | +---+ +---+ +---+ | + | | | ^ | | + | | +-------------+ | | + | +-----------------------------+ | + +------------------------------------+ + + +------+ + |buffer| RING BUFFER + |page |-------H-----------+ <--- New head page + +------+ <---------------+ v + | ^ +---+ +---+ +---+ + | | | | | |-->| | + | | New | | | |<--| |<-+ + | | Reader +---+ +---+ +---+ | + | | page ----^ | | + | | | | + | +-----------------------------+ | + +------------------------------------+ + +Another important point. The page that the reader page points back to +by its previous pointer (the one that now points to the new head page) +never points back to the reader page. That is because the reader page is +not part of the ring buffer. Traversing the ring buffer via the next pointers +will always stay in the ring buffer. Traversing the ring buffer via the +prev pointers may not. + +Note, the way to determine a reader page is simply by examining the previous +pointer of the page. If the next pointer of the previous page does not +point back to the original page, then the original page is a reader page: + + + +--------+ + | reader | next +----+ + | page |-------->| |<====== (buffer page) + +--------+ +----+ + | | ^ + | v | next + prev | +----+ + +------------->| | + +----+ + +The way the head page moves forward: + +When the tail page meets the head page and the buffer is in overwrite mode +and more writes take place, the head page must be moved forward before the +writer may move the tail page. The way this is done is that the writer +performs a cmpxchg to convert the pointer to the head page from the HEADER +flag to have the UPDATE flag set. Once this is done, the reader will +not be able to swap the head page from the buffer, nor will it be able to +move the head page, until the writer is finished with the move. + +This eliminates any races that the reader can have on the writer. The reader +must spin, and this is why the reader can not preempt the writer. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-H->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +The following page will be made into the new head page. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +After the new head page has been set, we can set the old head page +pointer back to NORMAL. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +After the head page has been moved, the tail page may now move forward. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + + +The above are the trivial updates. Now for the more complex scenarios. + + +As stated before, if enough writes preempt the first write, the +tail page may make it all the way around the buffer and meet the commit +page. At this time, we must start dropping writes (usually with some kind +of warning to the user). But what happens if the commit was still on the +reader page? The commit page is not part of the ring buffer. The tail page +must account for this. + + + reader page commit page + | | + v | + +---+ | + | |<----------+ + | | + | |------+ + +---+ | + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-H->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + ^ + | + tail page + +If the tail page were to simply push the head page forward, the commit when +leaving the reader page would not be pointing to the correct page. + +The solution to this is to test if the commit page is on the reader page +before pushing the head page. If it is, then it can be assumed that the +tail page wrapped the buffer, and we must drop new writes. + +This is not a race condition, because the commit page can only be moved +by the outter most writer (the writer that was preempted). +This means that the commit will not move while a writer is moving the +tail page. The reader can not swap the reader page if it is also being +used as the commit page. The reader can simply check that the commit +is off the reader page. Once the commit page leaves the reader page +it will never go back on it unless a reader does another swap with the +buffer page that is also the commit page. + + +Nested writes +------------- + +In the pushing forward of the tail page we must first push forward +the head page if the head page is the next page. If the head page +is not the next page, the tail page is simply updated with a cmpxchg. + +Only writers move the tail page. This must be done atomically to protect +against nested writers. + + temp_page = tail_page + next_page = temp_page->next + cmpxchg(tail_page, temp_page, next_page) + +The above will update the tail page if it is still pointing to the expected +page. If this fails, a nested write pushed it forward, the the current write +does not need to push it. + + + temp page + | + v + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Nested write comes in and moves the tail page forward: + + tail page (moved by nested writer) + temp page | + | | + v v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +The above would fail the cmpxchg, but since the tail page has already +been moved forward, the writer will just try again to reserve storage +on the new tail page. + +But the moving of the head page is a bit more complex. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-H->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +The write converts the head page pointer to UPDATE. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +But if a nested writer preempts here. It will see that the next +page is a head page, but it is also nested. It will detect that +it is nested and will save that information. The detection is the +fact that it sees the UPDATE flag instead of a HEADER or NORMAL +pointer. + +The nested writer will set the new head page pointer. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +But it will not reset the update back to normal. Only the writer +that converted a pointer from HEAD to UPDATE will convert it back +to NORMAL. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +After the nested writer finishes, the outer most writer will convert +the UPDATE pointer to NORMAL. + + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + + +It can be even more complex if several nested writes came in and moved +the tail page ahead several pages: + + +(first writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-H->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +The write converts the head page pointer to UPDATE. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Next writer comes in, and sees the update and sets up the new +head page. + +(second writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +The nested writer moves the tail page forward. But does not set the old +update page to NORMAL because it is not the outer most writer. + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-H->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Another writer preempts and sees the page after the tail page is a head page. +It changes it from HEAD to UPDATE. + +(third writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-U->| |---> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +The writer will move the head page forward: + + +(third writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-U->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +But now that the third writer did change the HEAD flag to UPDATE it +will convert it to normal: + + +(third writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + + +Then it will move the tail page, and return back to the second writer. + + +(second writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + + +The second writer will fail to move the tail page because it was already +moved, so it will try again and add its data to the new tail page. +It will return to the first writer. + + +(first writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +The first writer can not know atomically test if the tail page moved +while it updates the HEAD page. It will then update the head page to +what it thinks is the new head page. + + +(first writer) + + tail page + | + v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-H->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Since the cmpxchg returns the old value of the pointer the first writer +will see it succeeded in updating the pointer from NORMAL to HEAD. +But as we can see, this is not good enough. It must also check to see +if the tail page is either where it use to be or on the next page: + + +(first writer) + + A B tail page + | | | + v v v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |-H->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +If tail page != A and tail page does not equal B, then it must reset the +pointer back to NORMAL. The fact that it only needs to worry about +nested writers, it only needs to check this after setting the HEAD page. + + +(first writer) + + A B tail page + | | | + v v v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |-U->| |--->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Now the writer can update the head page. This is also why the head page must +remain in UPDATE and only reset by the outer most writer. This prevents +the reader from seeing the incorrect head page. + + +(first writer) + + A B tail page + | | | + v v v + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ +<---| |--->| |--->| |--->| |-H-> +--->| |<---| |<---| |<---| |<--- + +---+ +---+ +---+ +---+ + diff --git a/Documentation/vgaarbiter.txt b/Documentation/vgaarbiter.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..987f9b0a5ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vgaarbiter.txt @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ + +VGA Arbiter +=========== + +Graphic devices are accessed through ranges in I/O or memory space. While most +modern devices allow relocation of such ranges, some "Legacy" VGA devices +implemented on PCI will typically have the same "hard-decoded" addresses as +they did on ISA. For more details see "PCI Bus Binding to IEEE Std 1275-1994 +Standard for Boot (Initialization Configuration) Firmware Revision 2.1" +Section 7, Legacy Devices. + +The Resource Access Control (RAC) module inside the X server [0] existed for +the legacy VGA arbitration task (besides other bus management tasks) when more +than one legacy device co-exists on the same machine. But the problem happens +when these devices are trying to be accessed by different userspace clients +(e.g. two server in parallel). Their address assignments conflict. Moreover, +ideally, being an userspace application, it is not the role of the the X +server to control bus resources. Therefore an arbitration scheme outside of +the X server is needed to control the sharing of these resources. This +document introduces the operation of the VGA arbiter implemented for Linux +kernel. + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +I. Details and Theory of Operation + I.1 vgaarb + I.2 libpciaccess + I.3 xf86VGAArbiter (X server implementation) +II. Credits +III.References + + +I. Details and Theory of Operation +================================== + +I.1 vgaarb +---------- + +The vgaarb is a module of the Linux Kernel. When it is initially loaded, it +scans all PCI devices and adds the VGA ones inside the arbitration. The +arbiter then enables/disables the decoding on different devices of the VGA +legacy instructions. Device which do not want/need to use the arbiter may +explicitly tell it by calling vga_set_legacy_decoding(). + +The kernel exports a char device interface (/dev/vga_arbiter) to the clients, +which has the following semantics: + + open : open user instance of the arbiter. By default, it's attached to + the default VGA device of the system. + + close : close user instance. Release locks made by the user + + read : return a string indicating the status of the target like: + + "<card_ID>,decodes=<io_state>,owns=<io_state>,locks=<io_state> (ic,mc)" + + An IO state string is of the form {io,mem,io+mem,none}, mc and + ic are respectively mem and io lock counts (for debugging/ + diagnostic only). "decodes" indicate what the card currently + decodes, "owns" indicates what is currently enabled on it, and + "locks" indicates what is locked by this card. If the card is + unplugged, we get "invalid" then for card_ID and an -ENODEV + error is returned for any command until a new card is targeted. + + + write : write a command to the arbiter. List of commands: + + target <card_ID> : switch target to card <card_ID> (see below) + lock <io_state> : acquires locks on target ("none" is an invalid io_state) + trylock <io_state> : non-blocking acquire locks on target (returns EBUSY if + unsuccessful) + unlock <io_state> : release locks on target + unlock all : release all locks on target held by this user (not + implemented yet) + decodes <io_state> : set the legacy decoding attributes for the card + + poll : event if something changes on any card (not just the + target) + + card_ID is of the form "PCI:domain:bus:dev.fn". It can be set to "default" + to go back to the system default card (TODO: not implemented yet). Currently, + only PCI is supported as a prefix, but the userland API may support other bus + types in the future, even if the current kernel implementation doesn't. + +Note about locks: + +The driver keeps track of which user has which locks on which card. It +supports stacking, like the kernel one. This complexifies the implementation +a bit, but makes the arbiter more tolerant to user space problems and able +to properly cleanup in all cases when a process dies. +Currently, a max of 16 cards can have locks simultaneously issued from +user space for a given user (file descriptor instance) of the arbiter. + +In the case of devices hot-{un,}plugged, there is a hook - pci_notify() - to +notify them being added/removed in the system and automatically added/removed +in the arbiter. + +There's also a in-kernel API of the arbiter in the case of DRM, vgacon and +others which may use the arbiter. + + +I.2 libpciaccess +---------------- + +To use the vga arbiter char device it was implemented an API inside the +libpciaccess library. One fieldd was added to struct pci_device (each device +on the system): + + /* the type of resource decoded by the device */ + int vgaarb_rsrc; + +Besides it, in pci_system were added: + + int vgaarb_fd; + int vga_count; + struct pci_device *vga_target; + struct pci_device *vga_default_dev; + + +The vga_count is usually need to keep informed how many cards are being +arbitrated, so for instance if there's only one then it can totally escape the +scheme. + + +These functions below acquire VGA resources for the given card and mark those +resources as locked. If the resources requested are "normal" (and not legacy) +resources, the arbiter will first check whether the card is doing legacy +decoding for that type of resource. If yes, the lock is "converted" into a +legacy resource lock. The arbiter will first look for all VGA cards that +might conflict and disable their IOs and/or Memory access, including VGA +forwarding on P2P bridges if necessary, so that the requested resources can +be used. Then, the card is marked as locking these resources and the IO and/or +Memory access is enabled on the card (including VGA forwarding on parent +P2P bridges if any). In the case of vga_arb_lock(), the function will block +if some conflicting card is already locking one of the required resources (or +any resource on a different bus segment, since P2P bridges don't differentiate +VGA memory and IO afaik). If the card already owns the resources, the function +succeeds. vga_arb_trylock() will return (-EBUSY) instead of blocking. Nested +calls are supported (a per-resource counter is maintained). + + +Set the target device of this client. + int pci_device_vgaarb_set_target (struct pci_device *dev); + + +For instance, in x86 if two devices on the same bus want to lock different +resources, both will succeed (lock). If devices are in different buses and +trying to lock different resources, only the first who tried succeeds. + int pci_device_vgaarb_lock (void); + int pci_device_vgaarb_trylock (void); + +Unlock resources of device. + int pci_device_vgaarb_unlock (void); + +Indicates to the arbiter if the card decodes legacy VGA IOs, legacy VGA +Memory, both, or none. All cards default to both, the card driver (fbdev for +example) should tell the arbiter if it has disabled legacy decoding, so the +card can be left out of the arbitration process (and can be safe to take +interrupts at any time. + int pci_device_vgaarb_decodes (int new_vgaarb_rsrc); + +Connects to the arbiter device, allocates the struct + int pci_device_vgaarb_init (void); + +Close the connection + void pci_device_vgaarb_fini (void); + + +I.3 xf86VGAArbiter (X server implementation) +-------------------------------------------- + +(TODO) + +X server basically wraps all the functions that touch VGA registers somehow. + + +II. Credits +=========== + +Benjamin Herrenschmidt (IBM?) started this work when he discussed such design +with the Xorg community in 2005 [1, 2]. In the end of 2007, Paulo Zanoni and +Tiago Vignatti (both of C3SL/Federal University of Paranį) proceeded his work +enhancing the kernel code to adapt as a kernel module and also did the +implementation of the user space side [3]. Now (2009) Tiago Vignatti and Dave +Airlie finally put this work in shape and queued to Jesse Barnes' PCI tree. + + +III. References +============== + +[0] http://cgit.freedesktop.org/xorg/xserver/commit/?id=4b42448a2388d40f257774fbffdccaea87bd0347 +[1] http://lists.freedesktop.org/archives/xorg/2005-March/006663.html +[2] http://lists.freedesktop.org/archives/xorg/2005-March/006745.html +[3] http://lists.freedesktop.org/archives/xorg/2007-October/029507.html diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index 450b8f8c389..525edb37c75 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -21,3 +21,5 @@ 20 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1255 [0070:2251] 21 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1210 [0070:2291,0070:2295] 22 -> Mygica X8506 DMB-TH [14f1:8651] + 23 -> Magic-Pro ProHDTV Extreme 2 [14f1:8657] + 24 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1850 [0070:8541] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 0736518b2f8..3385f8b094a 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -80,3 +80,4 @@ 79 -> Terratec Cinergy HT PCI MKII [153b:1177] 80 -> Hauppauge WinTV-IR Only [0070:9290] 81 -> Leadtek WinFast DTV1800 Hybrid [107d:6654] + 82 -> WinFast DTV2000 H rev. J [107d:6f2b] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 014d255231f..b13fcbd5d94 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ 6 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 USB (em2800) 7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II (em2800) [0413:6023] 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800) - 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,2304:0207,2304:021a] + 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,1b80:e304,2304:0207,2304:021a] 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500] 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ 19 -> EM2860/SAA711X Reference Design (em2860) 20 -> AMD ATI TV Wonder HD 600 (em2880) [0438:b002] 21 -> eMPIA Technology, Inc. GrabBeeX+ Video Encoder (em2800) [eb1a:2801] - 22 -> Unknown EM2750/EM2751 webcam grabber (em2750) [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2751] + 22 -> EM2710/EM2750/EM2751 webcam grabber (em2750) [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2751] 23 -> Huaqi DLCW-130 (em2750) 24 -> D-Link DUB-T210 TV Tuner (em2820/em2840) [2001:f112] 25 -> Gadmei UTV310 (em2820/em2840) @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ 34 -> Terratec Cinergy A Hybrid XS (em2860) [0ccd:004f] 35 -> Typhoon DVD Maker (em2860) 36 -> NetGMBH Cam (em2860) - 37 -> Gadmei UTV330 (em2860) + 37 -> Gadmei UTV330 (em2860) [eb1a:50a6] 38 -> Yakumo MovieMixer (em2861) 39 -> KWorld PVRTV 300U (em2861) [eb1a:e300] 40 -> Plextor ConvertX PX-TV100U (em2861) [093b:a005] @@ -67,3 +67,4 @@ 69 -> KWorld ATSC 315U HDTV TV Box (em2882) [eb1a:a313] 70 -> Evga inDtube (em2882) 71 -> Silvercrest Webcam 1.3mpix (em2820/em2840) + 72 -> Gadmei UTV330+ (em2861) diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 15562427e8a..0ac4d254477 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -153,8 +153,8 @@ 152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00 [1043:4857] 153 -> Kworld Plus TV Analog Lite PCI [17de:7128] 154 -> Avermedia AVerTV GO 007 FM Plus [1461:f31d] -155 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1120 ATSC/QAM-Hybrid [0070:6706,0070:6708] -156 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1110r3 DVB-T/Hybrid [0070:6707,0070:6709,0070:670a] +155 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1150 ATSC/QAM-Hybrid [0070:6706,0070:6708] +156 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1120 DVB-T/Hybrid [0070:6707,0070:6709,0070:670a] 157 -> Avermedia AVerTV Studio 507UA [1461:a11b] 158 -> AVerMedia Cardbus TV/Radio (E501R) [1461:b7e9] 159 -> Beholder BeholdTV 505 RDS [0000:505B] @@ -167,3 +167,7 @@ 166 -> Beholder BeholdTV 607 RDS [5ace:6073] 167 -> Beholder BeholdTV 609 RDS [5ace:6092] 168 -> Beholder BeholdTV 609 RDS [5ace:6093] +169 -> Compro VideoMate S350/S300 [185b:c900] +170 -> AverMedia AverTV Studio 505 [1461:a115] +171 -> Beholder BeholdTV X7 [5ace:7595] +172 -> RoverMedia TV Link Pro FM [19d1:0138] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner index be67844074d..ba9fa679e2d 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner @@ -78,3 +78,4 @@ tuner=77 - TCL tuner MF02GIP-5N-E tuner=78 - Philips FMD1216MEX MK3 Hybrid Tuner tuner=79 - Philips PAL/SECAM multi (FM1216 MK5) tuner=80 - Philips FQ1216LME MK3 PAL/SECAM w/active loopthrough +tuner=81 - Partsnic (Daewoo) PTI-5NF05 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt index 04986efb731..d230878e473 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt @@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ Table of Contents 1.0 Introduction - The file ../drivers/char/c-qcam.c is a device driver for the -Logitech (nee Connectix) parallel port interface color CCD camera. + The file ../../drivers/media/video/c-qcam.c is a device driver for +the Logitech (nee Connectix) parallel port interface color CCD camera. This is a fairly inexpensive device for capturing images. Logitech does not currently provide information for developers, but many people have engineered several solutions for non-Microsoft use of the Color diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 2bcf78896e2..4686e84dd80 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -44,7 +44,9 @@ zc3xx 0458:7007 Genius VideoCam V2 zc3xx 0458:700c Genius VideoCam V3 zc3xx 0458:700f Genius VideoCam Web V2 sonixj 0458:7025 Genius Eye 311Q +sn9c20x 0458:7029 Genius Look 320s sonixj 0458:702e Genius Slim 310 NB +sn9c20x 045e:00f4 LifeCam VX-6000 (SN9C20x + OV9650) sonixj 045e:00f5 MicroSoft VX3000 sonixj 045e:00f7 MicroSoft VX1000 ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam @@ -138,6 +140,7 @@ spca500 04fc:7333 PalmPixDC85 sunplus 04fc:ffff Pure DigitalDakota spca501 0506:00df 3Com HomeConnect Lite sunplus 052b:1513 Megapix V4 +sunplus 052b:1803 MegaImage VI tv8532 0545:808b Veo Stingray tv8532 0545:8333 Veo Stingray sunplus 0546:3155 Polaroid PDC3070 @@ -180,6 +183,7 @@ ov534 06f8:3002 Hercules Blog Webcam ov534 06f8:3003 Hercules Dualpix HD Weblog sonixj 06f8:3004 Hercules Classic Silver sonixj 06f8:3008 Hercules Deluxe Optical Glass +pac7311 06f8:3009 Hercules Classic Link spca508 0733:0110 ViewQuest VQ110 spca508 0130:0130 Clone Digital Webcam 11043 spca501 0733:0401 Intel Create and Share @@ -233,8 +237,10 @@ pac7311 093a:2621 PAC731x pac7311 093a:2622 Genius Eye 312 pac7311 093a:2624 PAC7302 pac7311 093a:2626 Labtec 2200 +pac7311 093a:2629 Genious iSlim 300 pac7311 093a:262a Webcam 300k pac7311 093a:262c Philips SPC 230 NC +jeilinj 0979:0280 Sakar 57379 zc3xx 0ac8:0302 Z-star Vimicro zc0302 vc032x 0ac8:0321 Vimicro generic vc0321 vc032x 0ac8:0323 Vimicro Vc0323 @@ -245,6 +251,7 @@ zc3xx 0ac8:305b Z-star Vimicro zc0305b zc3xx 0ac8:307b Ldlc VC302+Ov7620 vc032x 0ac8:c001 Sony embedded vimicro vc032x 0ac8:c002 Sony embedded vimicro +vc032x 0ac8:c301 Samsung Q1 Ultra Premium spca508 0af9:0010 Hama USB Sightcam 100 spca508 0af9:0011 Hama USB Sightcam 100 sonixb 0c45:6001 Genius VideoCAM NB @@ -282,6 +289,29 @@ sonixj 0c45:613a Microdia Sonix PC Camera sonixj 0c45:613b Surfer SN-206 sonixj 0c45:613c Sonix Pccam168 sonixj 0c45:6143 Sonix Pccam168 +sonixj 0c45:6148 Digitus DA-70811/ZSMC USB PC Camera ZS211/Microdia +sn9c20x 0c45:6240 PC Camera (SN9C201 + MT9M001) +sn9c20x 0c45:6242 PC Camera (SN9C201 + MT9M111) +sn9c20x 0c45:6248 PC Camera (SN9C201 + OV9655) +sn9c20x 0c45:624e PC Camera (SN9C201 + SOI968) +sn9c20x 0c45:624f PC Camera (SN9C201 + OV9650) +sn9c20x 0c45:6251 PC Camera (SN9C201 + OV9650) +sn9c20x 0c45:6253 PC Camera (SN9C201 + OV9650) +sn9c20x 0c45:6260 PC Camera (SN9C201 + OV7670) +sn9c20x 0c45:6270 PC Camera (SN9C201 + MT9V011/MT9V111/MT9V112) +sn9c20x 0c45:627b PC Camera (SN9C201 + OV7660) +sn9c20x 0c45:627c PC Camera (SN9C201 + HV7131R) +sn9c20x 0c45:627f PC Camera (SN9C201 + OV9650) +sn9c20x 0c45:6280 PC Camera (SN9C202 + MT9M001) +sn9c20x 0c45:6282 PC Camera (SN9C202 + MT9M111) +sn9c20x 0c45:6288 PC Camera (SN9C202 + OV9655) +sn9c20x 0c45:628e PC Camera (SN9C202 + SOI968) +sn9c20x 0c45:628f PC Camera (SN9C202 + OV9650) +sn9c20x 0c45:62a0 PC Camera (SN9C202 + OV7670) +sn9c20x 0c45:62b0 PC Camera (SN9C202 + MT9V011/MT9V111/MT9V112) +sn9c20x 0c45:62b3 PC Camera (SN9C202 + OV9655) +sn9c20x 0c45:62bb PC Camera (SN9C202 + OV7660) +sn9c20x 0c45:62bc PC Camera (SN9C202 + HV7131R) sunplus 0d64:0303 Sunplus FashionCam DXG etoms 102c:6151 Qcam Sangha CIF etoms 102c:6251 Qcam xxxxxx VGA @@ -290,6 +320,7 @@ spca561 10fd:7e50 FlyCam Usb 100 zc3xx 10fd:8050 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k ov534 1415:2000 Sony HD Eye for PS3 (SLEH 00201) pac207 145f:013a Trust WB-1300N +sn9c20x 145f:013d Trust WB-3600R vc032x 15b8:6001 HP 2.0 Megapixel vc032x 15b8:6002 HP 2.0 Megapixel rz406aa spca501 1776:501c Arowana 300K CMOS Camera @@ -300,4 +331,11 @@ spca500 2899:012c Toptro Industrial spca508 8086:0110 Intel Easy PC Camera spca500 8086:0630 Intel Pocket PC Camera spca506 99fa:8988 Grandtec V.cap +sn9c20x a168:0610 Dino-Lite Digital Microscope (SN9C201 + HV7131R) +sn9c20x a168:0611 Dino-Lite Digital Microscope (SN9C201 + HV7131R) +sn9c20x a168:0613 Dino-Lite Digital Microscope (SN9C201 + HV7131R) +sn9c20x a168:0618 Dino-Lite Digital Microscope (SN9C201 + HV7131R) +sn9c20x a168:0614 Dino-Lite Digital Microscope (SN9C201 + MT9M111) +sn9c20x a168:0615 Dino-Lite Digital Microscope (SN9C201 + MT9M111) +sn9c20x a168:0617 Dino-Lite Digital Microscope (SN9C201 + MT9M111) spca561 abcd:cdee Petcam diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/si4713.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/si4713.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..25abdb78209 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/si4713.txt @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +Driver for I2C radios for the Silicon Labs Si4713 FM Radio Transmitters + +Copyright (c) 2009 Nokia Corporation +Contact: Eduardo Valentin <eduardo.valentin@nokia.com> + + +Information about the Device +============================ +This chip is a Silicon Labs product. It is a I2C device, currently on 0x63 address. +Basically, it has transmission and signal noise level measurement features. + +The Si4713 integrates transmit functions for FM broadcast stereo transmission. +The chip also allows integrated receive power scanning to identify low signal +power FM channels. + +The chip is programmed using commands and responses. There are also several +properties which can change the behavior of this chip. + +Users must comply with local regulations on radio frequency (RF) transmission. + +Device driver description +========================= +There are two modules to handle this device. One is a I2C device driver +and the other is a platform driver. + +The I2C device driver exports a v4l2-subdev interface to the kernel. +All properties can also be accessed by v4l2 extended controls interface, by +using the v4l2-subdev calls (g_ext_ctrls, s_ext_ctrls). + +The platform device driver exports a v4l2 radio device interface to user land. +So, it uses the I2C device driver as a sub device in order to send the user +commands to the actual device. Basically it is a wrapper to the I2C device driver. + +Applications can use v4l2 radio API to specify frequency of operation, mute state, +etc. But mostly of its properties will be present in the extended controls. + +When the v4l2 mute property is set to 1 (true), the driver will turn the chip off. + +Properties description +====================== + +The properties can be accessed using v4l2 extended controls. +Here is an output from v4l2-ctl util: +/ # v4l2-ctl -d /dev/radio0 --all -L +Driver Info: + Driver name : radio-si4713 + Card type : Silicon Labs Si4713 Modulator + Bus info : + Driver version: 0 + Capabilities : 0x00080800 + RDS Output + Modulator +Audio output: 0 (FM Modulator Audio Out) +Frequency: 1408000 (88.000000 MHz) +Video Standard = 0x00000000 +Modulator: + Name : FM Modulator + Capabilities : 62.5 Hz stereo rds + Frequency range : 76.0 MHz - 108.0 MHz + Subchannel modulation: stereo+rds + +User Controls + + mute (bool) : default=1 value=0 + +FM Radio Modulator Controls + + rds_signal_deviation (int) : min=0 max=90000 step=10 default=200 value=200 flags=slider + rds_program_id (int) : min=0 max=65535 step=1 default=0 value=0 + rds_program_type (int) : min=0 max=31 step=1 default=0 value=0 + rds_ps_name (str) : min=0 max=96 step=8 value='si4713 ' + rds_radio_text (str) : min=0 max=384 step=32 value='' + audio_limiter_feature_enabled (bool) : default=1 value=1 + audio_limiter_release_time (int) : min=250 max=102390 step=50 default=5010 value=5010 flags=slider + audio_limiter_deviation (int) : min=0 max=90000 step=10 default=66250 value=66250 flags=slider +audio_compression_feature_enabl (bool) : default=1 value=1 + audio_compression_gain (int) : min=0 max=20 step=1 default=15 value=15 flags=slider + audio_compression_threshold (int) : min=-40 max=0 step=1 default=-40 value=-40 flags=slider + audio_compression_attack_time (int) : min=0 max=5000 step=500 default=0 value=0 flags=slider + audio_compression_release_time (int) : min=100000 max=1000000 step=100000 default=1000000 value=1000000 flags=slider + pilot_tone_feature_enabled (bool) : default=1 value=1 + pilot_tone_deviation (int) : min=0 max=90000 step=10 default=6750 value=6750 flags=slider + pilot_tone_frequency (int) : min=0 max=19000 step=1 default=19000 value=19000 flags=slider + pre_emphasis_settings (menu) : min=0 max=2 default=1 value=1 + tune_power_level (int) : min=0 max=120 step=1 default=88 value=88 flags=slider + tune_antenna_capacitor (int) : min=0 max=191 step=1 default=0 value=110 flags=slider +/ # + +Here is a summary of them: + +* Pilot is an audible tone sent by the device. + +pilot_frequency - Configures the frequency of the stereo pilot tone. +pilot_deviation - Configures pilot tone frequency deviation level. +pilot_enabled - Enables or disables the pilot tone feature. + +* The si4713 device is capable of applying audio compression to the transmitted signal. + +acomp_enabled - Enables or disables the audio dynamic range control feature. +acomp_gain - Sets the gain for audio dynamic range control. +acomp_threshold - Sets the threshold level for audio dynamic range control. +acomp_attack_time - Sets the attack time for audio dynamic range control. +acomp_release_time - Sets the release time for audio dynamic range control. + +* Limiter setups audio deviation limiter feature. Once a over deviation occurs, +it is possible to adjust the front-end gain of the audio input and always +prevent over deviation. + +limiter_enabled - Enables or disables the limiter feature. +limiter_deviation - Configures audio frequency deviation level. +limiter_release_time - Sets the limiter release time. + +* Tuning power + +power_level - Sets the output power level for signal transmission. +antenna_capacitor - This selects the value of antenna tuning capacitor manually +or automatically if set to zero. + +* RDS related + +rds_ps_name - Sets the RDS ps name field for transmission. +rds_radio_text - Sets the RDS radio text for transmission. +rds_pi - Sets the RDS PI field for transmission. +rds_pty - Sets the RDS PTY field for transmission. + +* Region related + +preemphasis - sets the preemphasis to be applied for transmission. + +RNL +=== + +This device also has an interface to measure received noise level. To do that, you should +ioctl the device node. Here is an code of example: + +int main (int argc, char *argv[]) +{ + struct si4713_rnl rnl; + int fd = open("/dev/radio0", O_RDWR); + int rval; + + if (argc < 2) + return -EINVAL; + + if (fd < 0) + return fd; + + sscanf(argv[1], "%d", &rnl.frequency); + + rval = ioctl(fd, SI4713_IOC_MEASURE_RNL, &rnl); + if (rval < 0) + return rval; + + printf("received noise level: %d\n", rnl.rnl); + + close(fd); +} + +The struct si4713_rnl and SI4713_IOC_MEASURE_RNL are defined under +include/media/si4713.h. + +Stereo/Mono and RDS subchannels +=============================== + +The device can also be configured using the available sub channels for +transmission. To do that use S/G_MODULATOR ioctl and configure txsubchans properly. +Refer to v4l2-spec for proper use of this ioctl. + +Testing +======= +Testing is usually done with v4l2-ctl utility for managing FM tuner cards. +The tool can be found in v4l-dvb repository under v4l2-apps/util directory. + +Example for setting rds ps name: +# v4l2-ctl -d /dev/radio0 --set-ctrl=rds_ps_name="Dummy" + diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt index bb1f5c6e28b..510917ff59e 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt @@ -41,6 +41,8 @@ Possible debug options are P Poisoning (object and padding) U User tracking (free and alloc) T Trace (please only use on single slabs) + O Switch debugging off for caches that would have + caused higher minimum slab orders - Switch all debugging off (useful if the kernel is configured with CONFIG_SLUB_DEBUG_ON) @@ -59,6 +61,14 @@ to the dentry cache with slub_debug=F,dentry +Debugging options may require the minimum possible slab order to increase as +a result of storing the metadata (for example, caches with PAGE_SIZE object +sizes). This has a higher liklihood of resulting in slab allocation errors +in low memory situations or if there's high fragmentation of memory. To +switch off debugging for such caches by default, use + + slub_debug=O + In case you forgot to enable debugging on the kernel command line: It is possible to enable debugging manually when the kernel is up. Look at the contents of: diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 8da3a795083..30b43e1b269 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -599,6 +599,7 @@ Protocol: 2.07+ 0x00000000 The default x86/PC environment 0x00000001 lguest 0x00000002 Xen + 0x00000003 Moorestown MID Field name: hardware_subarch_data Type: write (subarch-dependent) diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt index 4f913857b8a..feb37e17701 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ Offset Proto Name Meaning 000/040 ALL screen_info Text mode or frame buffer information (struct screen_info) 040/014 ALL apm_bios_info APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info) +058/008 ALL tboot_addr Physical address of tboot shared page 060/010 ALL ist_info Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information (struct ist_info) 080/010 ALL hd0_info hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!! |